Modular Protection System For Motors: Bulletin 825-P

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 232
At a glance
Powered by AI
The manual describes a Modular Protection System for Motors and provides important user information regarding safety, standards, testing and troubleshooting.

The manual refers the user to publication SGI-1.1 which describes important safety differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be considered when applying the products.

The product has been tested to meet EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the safety requirements of EN 60947-4-1 and EN 60947-5-1.

Modular Protection System for Motors

Bulletin 825-P

User Manual

Important User Information

Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards. The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication. Rockwell Automation publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control (available from your local Allen-Bradley distributor), describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication. Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is prohibited. Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations: ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss.

!
IMPORTANT

Attention statements help you to: Identify a hazard Avoid a hazard Recognize the consequences Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Trademark List DeviceNet and the DeviceNet logo are trademarks of the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA). Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance

If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.

EMC Directive Notice


This product has been designed for environment A. Use of this product in environment B can cause unwanted elctromagnetic disturbances in which case the user could be required to take adequate mitigation measures. This product is tested to meet the Council Directive 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following standards, in whole: EN 60947-4-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear: Part 4: Contactors and Motor Starters - Section 1: Electromechanical Contactors and Motor Starters EN 60947-5-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear: Part 5: Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements - Section 1: Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Low Voltage Directive


This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage as amended by 93/68/EEC by applying the safety requirements of EN 60947-4-1 and EN 60947-5-1. For specific information required by EN 60947-4-1 and EN 60947-5-1, see the appropriate sections in this publication.

Table of Contents i

Preface
Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2

Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Standard Protection Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Optional Protection Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Monitoring Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Chapter 2: Installation
Relay Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Physical Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Relay Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Rear-Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Rear-Panel Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Top-Panel Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 I/O Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 AC/Control Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Fail-Safe/Non-Fail-Safe Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Converter Module Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Core Balance Current Transformer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Voltage Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Across the Line Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Star-Delta Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Two-Speed Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Field Serviceability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Fuse Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Real-Time Clock Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Chapter 3: Front-Panel Operation


Front-Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Normal Front-Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Front-Panel Automatic Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Front-Panel Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Alarm or Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Lockout Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ii

Table of Contents

Front-Panel Menus and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Front-Panel Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Front-Panel Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Main Menu > Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Main Menu > Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Main Menu > Motor Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Main Menu > Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Main Menu > Set/Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Main Menu > Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Main Menu > Reset Thermal Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Main Menu > Reboot/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 View or Change Settings Using the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Setting Entry Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 ASCII Serial Port Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Connect Your PC to the Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Configure Your Terminal Emulation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Using Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Serial Port Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Command Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Description of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 ACC and 2AC (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 ANALOG (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 DATE (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 METER (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 MOTOR (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 PASSWORD (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 QUIT (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 SER (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 SET (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 SHOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 STATUS (Level 1 or 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 STOP (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 STR (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 SUMMARY (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 TARGET (Level 1 or 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 TIME (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 View or Change Settings With Front-Panel Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 View Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Enter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Table of Contents iii

Chapter 5: Protection and Logic Functions


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Identifier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Phase Rotation, Nominal Frequency Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Current Transformer (CT) Configuration, Full Load Current Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Voltage Transformer (VT) Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Basic Motor Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Overload (Thermal Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Short Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Ground Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Undercurrent (Load Loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Current Imbalance/Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Protection Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Start Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Start Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Phase Reversal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Speed Switch (Stalling During Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Thermistor (PTC) Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 RTD-Based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 RTD Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Voltage-Based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Undervoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 VAR Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Underpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Power Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Load Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Trip Inhibit (Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Output Relay Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Timer Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Front-Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Display Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Logic Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Stop/Trip Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Initiate Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Unlatch Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Start and Emergency Restart Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

iv

Table of Contents

Chapter 6: Metering and Monitoring


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Instantaneous Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Thermal Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Power Measurement Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Motor Operating Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Chapter 7: Analyzing Events


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Event Summary Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Report Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Retrieving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Resetting the Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Serialized Events Recording (SER) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 SER Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Retrieving SER Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Resetting the SER Report Buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Example Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Event Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Serialized Events Recording (SER) Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Chapter 8: Testing and Troubleshooting


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Commissioning Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Selected Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Periodic Tests (Routine Maintenance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Appendix A: Specifications
Electrical Ratings: Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Ratings: Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTD Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825-CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-5 A-6 A-6 A-6 A-7

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Table of Contents v

Appendix B: Firmware Upgrade Instructions


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Upgrade Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Appendix C: Relay Word Bits


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

Appendix D: ASCII Port Relay Command Summary Appendix E: 825-P Settings Record
SET Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2 SET M Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13 I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13 SET P Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21 DeviceNet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21

Appendix F: Linear Parameter List


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

Appendix G: Modbus RTU Communications Protocol


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Modbus Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 Modbus Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2 Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2 Modbus Exception Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 Cyclical Redundancy Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 03h Read Holding Register Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 06h Preset Single Register Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 10h Preset Multiple Registers Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6 60h Read Parameter Information Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7 61h Read Parameter Text Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9 62h Read Enumeration Text Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10 7Dh Encapsulated Packet With Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11 7Eh NOP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12 Modbus Password Control and Parameter Modification . . . . . . . . G-12 Modbus Serialized Events Recording Register Operation . . . . . . . G-13 Modbus Load Profile Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

vi

Table of Contents

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Preface

Manual Overview

The 825-P Relay User Manual describes common aspects of motor relay application and use. It includes the necessary information to install, set, test, and operate the relay and more detailed information about settings and commands. The chapter descriptions are as follows: Preface Describes the manual organization and conventions used to present information. Chapter 1: Introduction Describes the basic features and functions of the 825-P. Chapter 2: Installation Describes how to mount and wire the 825-P; illustrates wiring connections for various applications. Chapter 3: Front-Panel Operation Explains features and use of the front panel, including front-panel command menu, default displays, and automatic messages. Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications Describes how to connect the 825-P to a PC for communication; shows serial port pinouts; lists and defines serial port commands. Chapter 5: Protection and Logic Functions Describes the operating characteristic of each protection element and explains how to calculate their settings; describes contact output logic. Chapter 6: Metering and Monitoring Describes the operation of each metering function; describes the monitoring functions. Chapter 7: Analyzing Events Describes front-panel LED operation, trip-type front-panel messages, event summary data, standard event reports, and Serialized Events Recording (SER) report. Chapter 8: Testing and Troubleshooting Describes protection element test procedures, relay self-test, and relay troubleshooting. Appendix A: Specifications Provides detailed specification and certification information for all components of the 825-P Modular Protection System. Appendix B: Firmware Upgrade Instructions Provides detailed specification and certification information for all components of the 825-P Modular Motor Protection Relay. Appendix C: Relay Word Bits Lists and describes the Relay Word bits (e.g., real-time status of relay I/O, protection functions). Appendix D: ASCII Port Relay Command Summary Briefly describes the serial port commands that are fully described in Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications.

P-2

Preface

Appendix E: 825-P Settings Record Provides the setting sheets that include the definition and input range for each setting in the relay. Space is provided for recording setting values for future reference. Appendix F: Linear Parameter List This appendix lists all accessible parameters of the 825-P relay in numerical order. The setting range for each parameter is provided to assist, especially for applications where you want to set values from a logic controller via a network connection. Appendix G: Modbus RTU Communications Protocol This appendix describes the communications features supported by the 825-P Modbus RTU option card.

Conventions

Typographic Conventions
The primary ways to configure the 825-P are: Using a command line interface on a PC terminal emulation window, such as Microsoft HyperTerminal. Using the front-panel menus and push buttons. The instructions in this manual indicate these options with specific font and formatting attributes.
Example STATUS Enter Ctrl+D Start > Settings CLOSE ENABLE MAIN > METER Description Commands typed at a command line interface on a PC. Single keystroke on a PC keyboard. Multiple/combination keystroke on a PC keyboard. PC dialog boxes and menu selections. The > character indicates submenus. Relay front-panel push buttons. Relay front-panel or rear-panel labels. Relay front-panel LCD menus and relay responses. The > character indicates submenus.

Examples
This instruction manual uses several example illustrations and instructions to explain how to effectively operate the 825-P. These examples are for demonstration purposes only; the firmware identification information or settings values included in these examples may not necessarily match those in the current version of your 825-P.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Introduction

Overview

The 825-P Motor Relay is designed to protect three-phase motors. The basic relay provides locked rotor, overload, unbalance, and short circuit protection. Voltage-based and RTD-based protection is available as an option. All relay models provide monitoring functions. This manual contains the information for installing, setting, testing, operating, and maintaining an 825-P. It is not necessary to review the entire manual to perform specific tasks. A Quick Start guide, Publication 825-QS001_-EN-P is also available. It will help to step the first-time user through the device commissioning process.

Features

Standard Protection Features


Thermal Overload (thermal model) PTC (positive temperature coefficient) Overtemperature Undercurrent (Load Loss) Current Imbalance and Phase Loss Overcurrent (Load Jam) Short Circuit Ground Fault Ground Fault (uses core balance CT) Motor Starting/Running Protection Inhibit During Start Start Motor Timer Notching or Jogging Device TCU (Thermal Capacity Utilization) Start Inhibit Anti-Backspin Timer Emergency Start Two Speed Protection Reduced Voltage Starting (Star-Delta) StallSpeed Switch Frequency

1-2

Introduction

Optional Protection Features


Voltage-Based Protection
Undervoltage Overvoltage Underpower Reactive Overpower Phase Reversal Power Factor

RTD-Based Protection
Up to 12 RTDs can be monitored when an external 825-PR12D RTD Scanner is used. There are separate trip and warn settings for each RTD.

Monitoring Features
The monitoring features of the 825-P are as follows: Event summaries that contain relay ID, date and time, trip cause, and current/voltage magnitudes. The last five trip causes are saved in nonvolatile memory. Serialized Events Recording (SER). Motor running time since the last reset. Start cycles since the last reset. Emergency start cycles since the last reset. A complete suite of accurate metering functions.

Options and Accessories

Options
The 825-P has the following options: Voltage Option: four-wire wye or open-delta connected VTs. Input/Output (I/O) Option: one 420 mA analog (transducer) output, three additional control inputs, and four additional contact outputs. Network Communications options.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Introduction

1-3

Accessories
Phase current inputs require one of the following external 825-MCM converter modules:
Table 1.1 Converter Module List Cat. No. 825-MCM2 825-MCM20 825-MCM180 825-MCM630 825-MCM630N Description 0.52.5 A Converter Module 2.520.0 A Converter Module 20.0180.0 A Converter Module 160.0630.0 A Converter Module 160.0630.0 A Converter Module

A separate zero-sequence current input requires an external 825-CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer, or equivalent. The following devices are required to add RTD protection: An external 825-PR12D RTD. A simplex 62.5/125 m fiber-optic cable with ST connector for connecting the external RTD module to the 825-P.

Applications

Chapter 2: Installation includes AC and DC connection diagrams for various applications. The following are possible scenarios: With or without phase current transformers With or without zero-sequence core balance current transformer With or without external RTD module Across the line starting Star-delta starting Two-speed motors

Figure 1.1 shows across the line starting AC connections for the case where external current transformers are not required. Refer to Chapter 2: Installation for additional applications and the related connection diagrams.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

1-4

Introduction

Figure 1.1 AC Connections Without CTs


L1 A1 A2 1 2 3 4 5 825-P 6 L2 L3 U1 Converter Module Cat. No. 825-MCM2 Cat. No. 825-MCM20 Cat. No. 825-MCM180 Cat. No. 825-MCM630 Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

825-MCM

M 3~

1522_IM_0008_AcConnections_a.eps

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Installation

Relay Placement

Proper placement of the 825-P Motor Relay helps make certain that you receive years of trouble-free motor protection. Use the following guidelines for proper physical installation of the 825-P.

Physical Location
You can mount the 825-P in a sheltered indoor environment (a building or an enclosed cabinet) that does not exceed the temperature and humidity ratings for the relay. The relay can be mounted indoors or in an outdoor (extended) enclosure where the relay is protected against exposure to direct sunlight, precipitation, and full wind pressure, but neither temperature nor humidity are controlled. Refer to Appendix A: Specifications for environmental ratings.

2-2

Installation

Relay Mounting
To flush mount the 825-P in a panel, cut a rectangular hole with the dimensions shown in Figure 2.1.
Figure 2.1 Relay Mounted In a Panel

18 (7. 6.0 32 )

Legend mm (in) 138.0 (5.43) Mounting Panelmaximum thickness 6.5 mm #8 x 1/2 inch mounting screw; Torque specification = 0.9...1.3 N.m (8...12 Lb-in) Gasket

19 (7. 2.0 56 )

0 4. ) 14 .67 (5

147.4 (5.80)

20.8 (0.82)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-3

Rear-Panel Connections

Rear-Panel Diagram
The physical layout of the connectors on the rear-panel of a fully configured 825-P is shown in Figure 2.2.
Figure 2.2 Rear-Panel Layout

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-4

Installation

Top-Panel Diagram
The input and output designations for the rear-panel connectors of a fully configured 825-P are shown in Figure 2.3. This diagram is located on the top panel of the relay.
Figure 2.3 Top-Panel Input and Output Designations

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-5

Power Connections
The power terminals on the rear panel (A1+ and A2-) must connect to 110240V AC or 110250V DC. For complete power input specifications, see Appendix A: Specifications. The power terminals are isolated from chassis ground. Use 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) size or heavier wire to connect to the POWER terminals. Connection to external power must comply with IEC 947-1 and IEC 947-3. Place an external switch, circuit breaker, or overcurrent device in the power leads for the 825-P; this device must interrupt both the hot (H) and neutral (N) power leads. The maximum current rating for the power disconnect circuit breaker or overcurrent device (fuse) must be 20 A. Be sure to locate this device within 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) of the relay. Operational power is internally fused by power supply fuse. See Field Serviceability on page 2-18 for details. Be sure to use fuses that comply with IEC 127-2.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-6

Installation

I/O Diagram
A more functional representation of the control (I/O) connections are shown in Figure 2.4.
Figure 2.4 Control I/O Connections in Powered-Down State
110240 V AC or 110250 V DC 24 or 120 V AC/+V DC 24 V AC/+V DC #5 +/H A1 Y26 Y24 Y22 Y14 Y12 95 #4 #3 #2 #1 13 23 33 43 53 63 I+ Analog Out A I T1 T2 RX PTC F/O Cable to RTD Scanner

IN5

IN4

IN3

IN2

IN1

PS

Trip

Aux1 Aux2 Aux3 Aux4 Aux5 Aux6 Alarm 14 24 34 44 54 64 BK BU

825-P Relay

A2 /N

Y2

Y1 98

96

SH

WH

RD

V CAN_L Drain CAN_H V +

24 or 120 V AC/V DC 24 V AC/V DC DeviceNet Cable

See Table 5.38 for control function assignment to the input IN1 and IN2. Connect the appropriate external contacts (#1 and #2) to the Inputs IN3, IN4, and IN5 are available when an optional I/O extension card is present. 825-PIOD inputs are rated 120V AC/DC. 825-PIOR See Table 5.36 for mapping protection elements to the Trip output. See Figure 2.6 and Figure 2.15 for typical control circuit connections. See Table 5.37 for mapping protection and/or control elements to the Aux outputs. Outputs Aux3 through Aux6 are available when an Analog Output is available when an optional I/O extension card is present. You can connect up to six thermistors (PTC) in series. See Table 2.1 for PTC cable requirements. Use an up to 500 meter long Simplex 62.5/125 mm fiber-optic cable (ST/ST). Available when an optional DeviceNet Communications Protocol Card is present.
optional I/O extension card is present. inputs are rated 24V AC/DC. inputs.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-7

Table 2.1 shows the maximum cable lengths for the PTC connections.
Table 2.1 PTC Cable Requirements Wire Size, Twisted Pair AWG No. 20 18 17 16 14 Maximum Length (meters) Shielded Cable 200 300 400 600 1000 Maximum Length (meters) Unshielded Cable 100 100 100 100 100

AC/Control Connection Diagrams

This section describes fail-safe versus non-fail-safe tripping, describes voltage connections, and provides the AC and DC wiring diagrams for the following applications: Across the line starting Star-delta starting Two-speed motor

Fail-Safe/Non-Fail-Safe Tripping
The Trip relay can be configured for Fail-Safe or Non-Fail-Safe operation by way of the Relay Behavior settings group discussed in Output Relay Behavior on page 5-27. The Trip relay output is a Form C contact consisting of a common terminal, a normally open (N.O.) terminal and a normally closed (N.C.) terminal. The terminals require different contact designations based on whether the Trip relay is configured for Fail-Safe or Non-Fail-Safe operation. The proper contact designations for Fail-Safe and Non-Fail-Safe configurations are identified in Figure 2.5. Be certain to apply the appropriate marking strip to the terminal plug corresponding to the configuration of the relay's trip output. The 825-P provides fail-safe and non-fail-safe trip modes (setting selectable) for the Trip and Aux (auxiliary) contacts. The following occurs in fail-safe mode: The Trip relay coil is energized continuously. When the 825-P generates a trip signal, the Trip relay coil is de-energized. The Trip relay coil is also de-energized if the 825-P input power is removed or if the 825-P fails (self-test status is FAIL).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-8

Installation

Figure 2.5 TRIP Relay Output Contact Configurations

Note: Contact numbering changes are based on TRIP Fail-Safe setting.

Figure 2.6 shows fail-safe and non-fail-safe wiring methods to control breakers and contactors. Keep in mind that the "Fail-Safe (Electrically Held)" and "Non-Fail-Safe" labels apply to the whole row that they are aligned with and not just to the single diagram that they are next to.
Figure 2.6 TRIP Contact Fail-Safe and Non-Fail-Safe Options

Circuit Breaker

Contactor
STOP

95

Fail-Safe (Electrically Held)

98

CR

START 95

TC Bre aker Coil Trip


52A

96 act CR Cont orCoil

STOP 95

Non-Fail-Safe
98

CR

START 95

TC Bre aker Coil Trip


96 52A act CR Cont orCoil

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-9

Converter Module Connection


Figure 2.7 Converter Module Connection

4-meter cable is supplied with MCM converter module

MCM

Note: The 825-P relay is not EMC-tested for converter module connecting cable lengths greater than the 4-meter cable that is supplied.
Figure 2.8 Converter Module Dimensions
e d

e3

b1

d3 b b2

d1

e2 d2 a

e2

c1 c

Cat. No. 825-MCM2...825-MCM180

Cat. No. 825-MCM420

Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-10

Installation

Core Balance Current Transformer Connections


Figure 2.9 Core Balance Current Transformer Connections

825-CBCT Ground Fault Sensor (or customer-supplied equivalent)

Figure 2.10 825-CBCT Dimensions

Cat. No. 825-CBCT

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-11

Voltage Connections
With the Voltage Inputs option, the three-phase voltages can be directly connected, wye-wye VT connected, open-delta VT connected, or closed delta VT connected. Figure 2.11 shows the three most common methods of connecting the three-phase voltages.
Figure 2.11 Voltage Connections
L1 L2 L3 F1, F2, and F3 are fuses F1 F2 F3 Direct Connection (Xfmr Connection = Wye) L1 L2 L3 F1 L1 L1 L2 L3 N 825-P

F2

L2 825-P

F3

L3

Wye-Wye VT Connection L1 L2 L3 F1 L1

L2 825-P L3

F3 Open-Delta VT Connection

The recommended fuse is the Bussman KTK - 1/10, 1/10 ampere Limitron fuse, or its equivalent.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-12

Installation

Across the Line Starting


Figure 2.12 AC Connections Without CTs
L1 A1 A2 1 2 3 4 5 825-P 6 L2 L3 U1 Converter Module Cat. No. 825-MCM2 Cat. No. 825-MCM20 Cat. No. 825-MCM180 Cat. No. 825-MCM630 Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

825-MCM

M 3~

Figure 2.13 AC Connections With Core Balance CT


L1 L2 L3

1 2

3 4

5 825-P S1 S2 6 Converter Module 825-MCM2 825-MCM20 825-MCM180 825-MCM630 825-MCM630N

825-MCM

T2

T2 core balance transformer Current ratio of core balance current transformer Output from core balance current transformer

M 3~

1...2000:1 0...500 mA

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-13

Figure 2.14 AC Connections With Phase CTs and Core Balance CT


L1 L2 L3 Converter Module Cat. No. 825-MCM2 Cat. No. 825-MCM20

1 2

3 4

5 6 825-P S1 S2

825-MCM T1

T2

T1 primary current transformer ... A/5 A or ... A/1 A T2 core balance transformer Current ratio of core balance current transformer 1 ... 2000:1 Output from core balance current transformer 0 ... 500 mA

M 3~

Figure 2.15 Control Connections for Non-Fail-safe Tripping

S0 [

S1 [ 95

K1 A1 13

K1 S1 S0 H1 TR H3 AUX1

TR 96 A1 K1 A2 H1 98

AUX1 A2 H3

825-P 14

Contactor On push button Off push button Indicator "Contactor Closed" Trip relay Indicator "Alarm/Warning" Alarm relay Note: For AUX1 to work as an alarm/warning indicator, it must be mapped to the "Warning" function bit.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-14

Installation

Star-Delta Starting
Figure 2.16 AC Connections for Star-Delta Starting
L1 L2 L3

A1 K1 A2

5 K2D

A1 A2

5 K3Y

A1 A2

825-MCM U1 V1 M 3~ W1

825-P

U1 Converter Module Cat. No. 825-MCM2 Cat. No. 825-MCM20 Cat. No. 825-MCM180 Cat. No. 825-MCM630 Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

The star-delta application in Figure 2.17 and Figure 2.18 requires the following auxiliary relay settings:
AUX#H = 0001000 (Star), AUX# FAIL-SAFE = N AUX#H = 0000100 (Delta), AUX# FAIL-SAFE = N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-15

Figure 2.17 Control Connections for Star-Delta Starting


Contactor On pushbutton Off pushbutton Indicator "Contactor closed" TR Main relay H3 Indicator "Alarm/Warning AUX1 Alarm relay Note: For AUX1 to work a alarm/warning indicator, it must be mapped to the "Warning" function bit. 13 K1 S1 S0 H1

S0

S1

K1

95

A1

TR 96 53 825-P AUX5 63 AUX6 98

AUX1 A2

825-P 14

54

64

A1 A2 K3

A1 A2 K2 D

A1 H1 A2 K1 H H3

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-16

Installation

Two-Speed Motor
Figure 2.18 AC connections for a Two-Speed Motor
1 2 3 4 5 825-P L N 6 24 V AC/V DC

825-MCM

(I)

(II)

Y12 Y1 825-P M 3~

The two-speed motor applications in Figure 2.18 and Figure 2.19 require the following input setting:
IN1 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (SPEED2)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-17

Figure 2.19 AC Connections for a Two-Speed Motor With Primary CTs


L1 L2 L3 ... A / 1 (5) A I L1 L2 L3 L ... A / 1 (5) A II N

K1 M 3~

K2 24 V AC/V DC Y1 Y12 825-P

K2 (I) (II) K1

825-MCM

825-P

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-18

Installation

Field Serviceability
ATTENTION
Disconnect or de-energize all external connections before opening this device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device can cause electrical shock that can lead to injury or death. Equipment components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment, before removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not equipped to work with these components, contact Rockwell Automation about returning this device and related Rockwell Automation equipment for service.

The 825-P firmware can be upgraded in the field; refer to Appendix B: Firmware Upgrade Instructions for firmware upgrade instructions. You know when a self-test failure has occurred by monitoring the front-panel messages. By using the metering functions, you know if the analog front-end (not monitored by relay self-test) is functional. Refer to Chapter 8: Testing and Troubleshooting for detailed testing and troubleshooting information. The only two components that can be replaced in the field are the power supply fuse and the real-time clock battery. A lithium battery powers the clock (date and time) if the external power source is lost or removed. The battery retains the thermal memory for the thermal overload function when the power source is lost or removed. The battery is a 3V lithium coin cell, Rayovac BR2335 or equivalent. At room temperature (25C), the battery operates nominally for ten years at rated load. When the relay is powered from an external source, the battery experiences a low self-discharge rate. Thus, battery life can extend well beyond ten years. The battery cannot be recharged.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Installation

2-19

Fuse Replacement
To replace the Power Supply fuse, do the following: 1. De-energize the relay. 2. Remove the eight rear-panel screws, the ground screw, and the relay rear-panel. 3. Remove the Slot A printed circuit board. 4. Locate the fuse on the board. 5. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder. 6. Replace the fuse with a BUSS 2A/250V ABC (ceramic) or equivalent. 7. Insert the printed circuit board into Slot A. 8. Reinstall the relay rear-panel and ground screw, and then energize the relay.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

2-20

Installation

Real-Time Clock Battery Replacement


To replace the real-time clock battery, do the following: 1. De-energize the relay. 2. Remove the eight rear-panel screws, the ground screw, and the relay rear-panel. 3. Remove the Slot B printed circuit board. 4. Locate the battery clip (holder) on the board. 5. Remove the battery from beneath the clip. 6. Properly dispose of the old battery. 7. Install the new battery with the positive (+) side facing up. 8. Insert the printed circuit board into Slot B. 9. Reinstall the relay rear-panel and ground screw, and then energize the relay. 10. Set the relay date and time.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Front-Panel Operation

Front-Panel Layout

The 825-P Relay front-panel interface consists of two LEDs, an LCD display, a seven-button keypad, and an EIA-232 serial port connector. The front-panel layout is shown in Figure 3.1.
Figure 3.1 Relay Front Panel
EIA-232 Serial Port Quick access to all relay data, control, and setting functions using a PC, serial cable, and software.

ENABLE LED Lit when relay is operational.

LCD Display Displays real time and historic information; relay settings menus.

TRIP LED Flashes to indicate alarm conditions; steady on to indicate trip.

Front-Panel Pushbuttons Control the frontpanel display. {Enter} Pushbutton

TEST/RESET Pushbutton Reset the TRIP or TRIP TEST the relay.

Arrow Pushbuttons Facilitate navigation left, right, up, and down.

Normal Front-Panel Display

In normal operation, the relay ENABLE LED is illuminated and the LCD display screen is on. The LCD screen rotates displays showing each screen for about two seconds before moving to the next. The default rotating display screens include Unit ID Line 1, Unit ID Line 2, line currents, and voltages (if available). Enable the relay to add display messages as noted in the Display Enable settings in Table 5.35.

3-2

Front-Panel Operation

Figure 3.2 Default Display Screen


825-P Modular Prot. System

Use the UNIT ID LINE 1 (RID) and UNIT ID LINE 2 (TID) settings described in Identifier Settings on page 5-3 to change the contents of the information shown in Figure 3.2. If the front panel was in Access Level 2, it automatically returns to the default display when the display times out. For more information, see Table 5.34. The display changes for the following relay conditions in the order of precedence (see Table 3.1): Status failure Trip condition time to trip (if under 10000 seconds) Warning Lockout start request Emergency start in progress

Front-Panel Automatic Messages

The relay displays automatic messages under the conditions described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Front-Panel Automatic Messages Condition Front-Panel Message Relay detecting any failure Displays the type of latest failure (see Testing and Troubleshooting on page 8-1.) Relay trip has occurred Displays the type or cause of the trip. (See the list of the types of Trip messages under the heading Front-Panel Messages on page 3-2. Displays the predicted time to thermal element trip in seconds

Motor running overload

Relay alarm condition has Displays the type of alarm (see Alarm or Warning occurred Messages on page 3-3) When a start is requested Displays the type of lockout condition (see during a lockout condition Lockout Messages on page 3-4) Control input set to disable protection During emergency start Displays Protect Disabled By Control Input Displays Emergency Start

Front-Panel Messages
Each time the relay trips, it automatically displays a front-panel message and the Trip LED illuminates. If a trip occurs during a critical alarm status condition, the Trip LED flashes (see Self-Tests on page 8-11).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-3

Trip message
The Trip message describes the type of trip that occurred: Overload Trip Locked Rotor Trip Undercurrent Trip Jam Trip Current Imbalance Trip Short Circuit Trip Ground Fault Trip Speed Switch Trip Undervoltage Trip Overvoltage Trip Underpower Trip Power Factor Trip Reactive Power Trip Phase Reversal Trip Underfrequency Trip Overfrequency Trip RTD Trip PTC Trip Start Time Trip RTD Fail Trip PTC Fail Trip Comm Idle Loss Trip Remote Trip Comm Fail Trip

Alarm or Warning Messages


Each time the relay is in a warning condition with the Trip LED flashing, the front-panel displays the corresponding warning message.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-4

Front-Panel Operation

The Warning message describes the type of warning that is occurring: Overload Warning Undercurrent Warning Jam Warning Current Imbalance Warning Ground Fault Warning Short Circuit Warning Speed Switch Warning Undervoltage Warning Overvoltage Warning Underpower Warning Power Factor Warning Reactive Power Warning Underfrequency Warning Overfrequency Warning RTD Warning RTD Failure MCM/CWE Failure PTC Failure Comm. Loss Warning Comm. Idle Warning Comm. Fault Warning The relay automatically displays a thermal time to trip for an impending thermal overload. See Figure 3.3.
Figure 3.3 Trip Message Sample
Thermal Trip In 1234 sec

Lockout Messages
TCU Lockout Start/Hr Lockout Min Off Lockout Restart Lockout

Front-Panel Menus and Operations


Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

The 825-P front panel gives you access to most of the information that the relay measures and stores. You can also use front-panel controls to view or modify relay settings.

Front-Panel Operation

3-5

All of the front-panel functions are accessible using the seven-button keypad and LCD display. Use the keypad, shown in Figure 3.4, to maneuver within the front-panel menu structure, described in detail throughout the remainder of this section. Table 3.2 describes the function of each front-panel push button.
Figure 3.4 Front-Panel Push Buttons

Table 3.2 Front-Panel Push Button Functions Push Button UpArrow Function Move up within a menu or data list. While editing a setting value, increase the value of the underlined digit.

DownArrow Move down within a menu or data list. While editing a setting value, decrease the value of the underlined digit. LeftArrow Move the cursor to the left. While viewing event data, move to data for a newer event.

RightArrow Move the cursor to the right. While viewing Event data, move to the data for an older event. Esc Enter Re-activate the front-panel display back-lighting. Escape from the current menu or display. Move from the default display to the main menu. Select the menu item at the cursor. Select the displayed setting to edit the setting. Trip test the device. Reset the trip.

Trip/Reset

The Test/Reset push button has two functions if it has not been disabled. Pressing the Test/Reset push button resets the Trip LED and the Trip output of the relay. If a trip condition is active, the front-panel message displays the following:
Reset Failed TRIP is active

To test the trip output, press the Test/Reset push button for longer than two seconds. The Test/Reset push button is disabled when Disable settings are active (see Table 5.38).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-6

Front-Panel Operation

Front-Panel Security
Front-Panel Access Levels
The relay front panel typically operates at Access Level 1 and allows any user to view relay measurements and settings. Some activities, such as editing settings and controlling output contacts, are restricted to those operators who know the relay Access Level 2 password when enabled. The factory default setting for the Access Level 2 password is DISABLED, which provides unrestricted access. In the figures that follow, restricted activities are marked with the padlock symbol shown in Figure 3.5.
Figure 3.5 Access Level Security Padlock Symbol

Before you can perform a front-panel menu activity that is marked with the padlock symbol, you must enter the correct Access Level 2 password. After you have correctly entered the password, you can perform other Access Level 2 activities without reentering the password.

Access Level 2 Password Entry


When you try to perform an Access Level 2 activity, the relay determines whether you have entered the correct Access Level 2 password since the front-panel inactivity timer expired or since the "Reset Access Lvl" command has been executed from the Main Menu. If you have not, the relay displays the screen shown in Figure 3.6 for you to enter the password.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-7

Figure 3.6 Password Entry Screen


Password= Del Clr Accept A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . . . . . . a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z . . . . . . 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . . . . . . ! " # $ % ^ ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~

To Enter Password
Perform these steps to enter the correct password to issue an Access Level 2 function or to change the Access Level 2 password, as described in Figure 3.23 on page 3.16. 1. Press the DownArrow push button twice. A blinking cursor appears in the first character position of the password and an underline appears beneath the character (letter) A in the lower line of the display. 2. Underline the first character of the password by moving through the characters shown in Figure 3.6. Use the LeftArrow and RightArrow push buttons to move the underline to the left and right and the UpArrow and DownArrow push buttons to move to other character rows. 3. With the correct first character underlined, press the Enter push button. The first character appears in the upper line of the display and the blinking cursor moves one character to the right. 4. Using the arrow push buttons, continue to move within the character table and select each of the characters to build the Access Level 2 password.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-8

Front-Panel Operation

Note: The factory default Access Level 2 password is DISABLED. 5. With the correct Access Level 2 password visible in the upper line of the display, use the UpArrow and RightArrow push buttons to select Accept. 6. Press the Enter push button to accept the password shown in the upper line of the display. 7. If the password is correct, the relay displays the requested setting. 8. Press the Enter push button to continue your task. 9. If the password is incorrect, the relay displays the message Invalid Password. 10. Press the Enter push button to return to your previous task.

To Correct Entry Errors


To correct password entries, do the following: 1. If the cursor in the upper line of the display is blinking, press the Esc push button once. 2. Use the arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to the position of the incorrect letter. 3. With the incorrect letter underlined, press the DownArrow push button. The blinking cursor reappears in the upper line of the display and the underline cursor appears in the lower line. Add New Character. To substitute a new character in the location of the blinking cursor, use arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to the location of the character that you want in the character table; then press Enter. Delete Character. To delete the character at the blinking cursor, use the arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to Del and press the Enter push button. Clear Password. To clear the entire password and start over, use the arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to Clr and press the Enter push button. 4. Continue making corrections until the password appears in the upper line of the display. 5. With the correct Access Level 2 password visible in the upper line of the display, use the arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to ACCEPT.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-9

6. Press the Enter push button to accept the password shown in the upper line of the display. 7. If the password is correct, the relay continues the task. 8. Press the Enter push button to continue your task. If the password was incorrect, the relay displays the message Invalid Password. 9. Press the Enter push button to return to your password entry. 10. Repeat Steps 19 until you enter the correct password. 11. When you have completed changing settings, use the Main Menu command Reset Access Lvl (described in the next section) to reset the Access Level to Level 1 so that unauthorized access is prevented. (The access level will remain at Level 2 until the front panel backlight times out or the Reset Access Lvl command is executed.)

Front-Panel Main Menu

All access to information and relay settings through the front panel starts at the relay main menu. The remainder of this section describes the use of the main and lower level menus.

Main Menu
Note: The LCD display is dark if it is timed out from inactivity. Press any key to activate the LCD display.
Figure 3.7 Front Panel Main Menu
LCD Display CET 5 Modular Prot. System MAIN Meter Events Motor Monitor Press these keys to move within the list. Targets Set/Show Status Press this key to select an underlined menu item. Reset TCU Reboot/Restore Reset Access Lvl Main Menu

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-10

Front-Panel Operation

Main Menu > Meter


Figure 3.8 Main Menu > Meter Function
Main Menu Item Meter Events Meter Values Menu METER Instantaneous Thermal Press these keys to move within the list.

Press this key to select an underlined menu item.

The Meter menu includes functions to display meter data. Display functions are Instantaneous and Thermal. When you select a display function, such as Instantaneous in Figure 3.9, the relay displays a list of instantaneous meter values you can move through using the UpArrow and DownArrow push buttons. The Thermal display function operates similarly to the Instantaneous display function with the applicable thermal values displayed.
Figure 3.9 Meter Menu > Instantaneous Meter Display Functions
Meter Values Menu Item METER Instantaneous L1 Angle 2.3 deg Press these keys to move within the list. L2 Current 6.3 A Frequency 60.0 Hz Instantaneous Meter Display L1 Current 5.4 A

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-11

Main Menu > Events


Figure 3.10 Main Menu > Events Function
Main Menu Item Events Motor Monitor Events Display EVENTS Display Events Reset Events Press these keys to move within the list.

Press this key to select an underlined menu item. 1522 IM 0069 M i M

Figure 3.11 Events Menu > Display Events Function


Events Menu Item EVENTS Display Events Events Display 03/12/2003 13:48:09.902

Press these keys to move among events.

Press this key to select an event. Display Events Menu Item 03/12/2003 13:48:09.902 Time 13:48:09.902 Move among data for this event. Type Lockd Rotor Trip L1 Current Press this key to select event data. VCA 0 V 4.1 A Display Events Display Date 03/12/2003

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-12

Front-Panel Operation

Figure 3.12 Events > Reset Events

Events Menu Item Display Events Reset Events To move between Yes and No. Yes: Resets Event Data Buffer; No: Returns to EVENTS Menu. To select underlined option.

Reset Events Display Reset Evnt Data? No Yes

Main Menu > Motor Monitor


Figure 3.13 Main Menu > Motor Monitor Function
Main Menu Item Motor Targets Monitor Motor Monitor Menu MOTOR MONITOR Use Data Reset Statistics Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select an underlined menu item.

Figure 3.14 Motor Monitor > Use Data Function


Motor Monitor Menu Item Use Data Reset Statistics Motor Use Data Function Last Reset Date 03/24/2003 Last Reset Time Press these keys to move within the list. 13:28:21 Running Time 0:00:00 Stopped Time 1:03:49 Time Running 0.0 % Number of Starts 0 Emergency Starts 0

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-13

Figure 3.15 Motor Monitor > Reset Statistics Function

Motor Monitor Menu Item Use Data Reset Statistics To move between Yes and No. Yes: Resets Event Data Buffer; No: Returns to MOTOR MONITOR Menu. To select underlined option.

Reset Statistics Function Reset Stats? No Yes

Main Menu > Targets


The Target values provide real-time status of relay I/O, protection functions, etc. For detailed descriptions, see Appendix C: Relay Word Bits.
Figure 3.16 Main Menu > Targets Function
Main Menu Item Targets Set/Show Targets Function TARGETS Row 1=00000000 Row 2=00000000 Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select an underlined menu item. Row 3=00000010 Row 10=01000000

Targets Menu Item Row 1=00000000 Row 2=00000000

Targets Function 49T 0 LOSSTRIP 0 JAMTRIP 0 50G1T 0

Press these keys to move within the list of Relay Word targets. Press this key to return to the previous menu.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-14

Front-Panel Operation

Main Menu > Set/Show


Figure 3.17 Main Menu > Show/Set Function
Main Menu Item Set/Show Status Set/Show Function SET/SHOW RELAY PORT Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select an underlined menu item. IO ASSIGN DATE/TIME PASSWORD

Figure 3.18 SET/SHOW > RELAY Function


Set/Show Menu Item SET/SHOW RELAY Relay Function RELAY Main Settings Overload Set Short Ckt Set Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select a settings group to set or show. Timer Settings Front Panel Set Display Enable

Figure 3.19 RELAY > Main Settings Function


Set/Show Menu Item RELAY Main Settings Main Settings Function UNIT ID LINE 1 825-P Modular Unit ID LINE 2 Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select and edit. Prot. System PHASE ROTATION ABC XFMR CONNECTION WYE

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-15

Figure 3.20 Main Settings > PHASE ROTATION Function


Main Settings Menu Item PHASE ROTATION ABC Set Phase Rotation Function PHASE ROTATION PHROT=ABC

Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select setting.

Figure 3.21 Set Relay >PORT Function


Set/Show Menu Item PORT IO ASSIGN Press these keys to move within the list. Front Serial Port Settings SPEED 9600 bps DATA BITS 8 bits PARITY N Press this key to select a setting to edit. HDWR HANDSHAKING N Front Serial Port Setting SPEED 9600 bps Press these keys to view settings choices. Press this key to select a setting. Speed Setting SPEED SPEED=9600 bps You must be in Access Level 2 to edit a setting. The relay will request the Access Level 2 password (unless disabled) if you have not entered it during this session.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-16

Front-Panel Operation

Figure 3.22 Set/Show > DATE/TIME Function


Set/Show Menu Item DATE/TIME PASSWORD Time Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select a setting to edit. Date Setting Date 03/24/2003 Press these keys to move cursor to digit to change. Press these keys to change digits. Press this key to select a setting. Date Setting DATE=03/24/2003 17:05:53 Date/Time Settings Date 03/24/2003

Figure 3.23 Set\Show > PASSWORD Function


Set/Show Menu Item DATE/TIME PASSWORD Password Function New PW= Del Clr Accept A B C D E F G H Press these keys to move between rows. Press these keys to move between Del, Clr, Accept, and row characters. Press this key to select a character. Del: Delete character(s) Clr: Clear password Accept: Accept password/character(s) I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . . . . . . a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z . . . . . . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 . . . . . . ! " # $ % ^ ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~

Note: Edit the Access Level 2 password using the steps described in Access Level 2 Password Entry on page 3.6. Remember that the relay password is case
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-17

sensitive. To disable Access Level 2 password protection, set Password = DISABLE.


Figure 3.24 Save Settings Changes
Set/Show:Relay Menu Item RELAY Main Settings To move between Yes and No. Yes: Saves setting changes; No: Returns to relay settings. Press this key to select an underlined option. Save Changes Function Save Changes? Yes No

Main Menu > Status


Figure 3.25 Main Menu > Status Function
Main Menu Item Status Reset TCU FID 825-P Modular-R100-Vx0xxx-Z001001-D20030324 CID Press these keys to move within the list of self-test results. 10C9 Part Number 1522001BCX0X1X1X L1 OK L2 OK Relay Enabled Status Function

Note: When you enter into the Status mode after making a hardware configuration change, the relay prompts you for accepting the new hardware configuration.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-18

Front-Panel Operation

Main Menu > Reset Thermal Capacity


Figure 3.26 Main Menu > Reset Thermal Capacity Function
Reset Thermal Capacity Menu Item Reset TCU Reboot/Restore To Move between Yes and No. Yes: Resets thermal model data and timer; No: Cancels command. Press this key to select an underlined option. Reset Thermal Capacity Function Reset TCU? No Yes

Main Menu > Reboot/Restore


Figure 3.27 Main Menu > Reboot/Restore Function
Main Menu Item Reset TCU Reboot/Restore Reset/Restore Function REBOOT/RESTORE Reboot Relay Restore Defaults Press these keys to move within the list. Press this key to select an underlined menu item.

Figure 3.28 Reboot/Restore > Reboot Relay Function


Reset Relay Menu Item Reboot Relay Restore Defaults To move between Yes and No. Yes: Reboots the relay; No: Returns to previous menu. Press this key to select an underlined option. Reset Relay Function Reboot Relay? No Yes

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-19

Figure 3.29 Reboot/Restore > Restore Defaults Function


Restore Defaults Menu Item Reboot Relay Restore Defaults To move between Yes and No. Yes: Restores the relay to factory default settings; No: Returns to previous menu. Press this key to select an underlined option. Restore Defaults Function Restore Default? No Yes

Main Menu > Reset Access Level


Figure 3.30 Reset Front-Panel Access From Level 2 To Level 1
Main Menu Item Reboot/Restore Reset Access Lvl Reset Access Level Function Front Panel Access Lvl Reset

Resets the front-panel access from Level 2 to Level 1.

View or Change Settings Using the Front Panel

You can view or change settings using the push buttons on the front panel. Enter the front-panel menu by pressing the Esc button. It displays the following message:
MAIN Meter

Scroll down the menu by using the DownArrow push button until the display shows the following message:
Targets SET/SHOW

The cursor (underline) is on the SET/SHOW command. Enter the SET/ SHOW command by pressing the Enter push button. After pressing the Enter push button, the display shows the following message:
SET/SHOW RELAY

Enter the underlined Relay message with the Enter push button and you are presented with the Relay settings as listed in Appendix E: 825-P Settings
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-20

Front-Panel Operation

Record. Use the UpArrow and DownArrow and the LeftArrow and RightArrow push buttons to scroll through the relay settings and view or change them as required by selecting them and editing them. After viewing or changing the Relay settings, press the Esc push button until the following message appears:
Save Changes? Yes No

Select and enter the appropriate command by pressing the Enter push button. Select Yes to save the settings changes and No to discard the changes. Note: Each 825-P is shipped with default factory settings. Calculate the settings for your motor to ensure secure and dependable protection. Document the settings on the 825-P Settings Record before entering new settings in the relay (see Appendix E: 825-P Settings Record). Figure 3.31 shows a front-panel menu navigation example for the relay to enter the Phase Rotation (ABC, ACB) setting.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Front-Panel Operation

3-21

Figure 3.31 Front-Panel Setting Entry Example


Main Menu Meter Events Motor Monitor Targets Set/Show Status Reset TCU Set/Show Menu RELAY PORT IO ASSIGN Press to return DATE/TIME to the previous list. PASSWORD Press to select an underlined menu item. Press to move within the list.

RELAY Menu Main Settings Overload Set Front Panel Set Display Enable Main Settings Menu UNIT ID LN 1 UNIT ID LN 2 PH ROTATION RATED FREQ LINE VOLTAGE XFMR CON PHASE ROTATION Menu PHROT=ABC

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

3-22

Front-Panel Operation

Setting Entry Error Messages

As you enter relay settings, the relay checks the setting entered against the settings own range as published on the relay setting sheet. If an entered setting falls outside its range, the relay immediately responds with the message Out of Range and prompts you to reenter the setting. In addition to the immediate range check, several of the settings have interdependency checks with other settings. The relay checks setting interdependencies after you answer Y to the Saves Settings? prompt, but before the settings are stored. If any one of these checks fail, the relay issues one of the error messages shown in the Table 3.3, and returns you to the settings list for a correction.

Table 3.3 Setting Interdependency Error Messages Error Message 50NnP must be within xx.xx and yy.yy (n = 1 or 2) 50PnP must be less than xx.xx (n = 1 or 2) CTRn,FLAn Setting Combination Out of Range (n = 1 or 2) Setting /Function Correct the Condition

Ground FaultCore Modify the 50N1P or 50N2P setting to satisfy the Balance requirement shown in the error message. Short Circuit Main Settings Modify the 50P1P or 50P2P setting to satisfy the requirement shown in the error message. Modify the CTRn or FLAn setting to satisfy: 0.5 (FLAn/CTRn) 2.5 when MCM2 is used 2.5 (FLAn/CTRn) 20 when MCM20 is used 20 (FLAn/CTRn) 180 when MCM180 is used 160 (FLAn/CTRn) 630 when MCM630 is used Modify the LRA1 or LRA2 setting to satisfy the requirement shown in the error message. Modify the COOLTIME setting to satisfy the requirement shown in the error message. Modify the RTD location setting (RTDnLOC) to satisfy the requirement shown in the error message. Modify VNOM or PTR setting to satisfy: 100 (VNOM/PTR) 250 Modify INn assignment ensuring that input is not assigned to more than one element. Answer Y if you are using MCM630N. If you are using MCM630, you must modify the 50P1P or 50P2P setting below its saturation current to ensure proper protection. Answer Y if you are using MCM630N. If you are using MCM630, you must modify the LRA1 or LRA2 setting below its saturation current to ensure proper protection.

LRAn must be less than: xxx (n = 1 or 2) Minimum STOP COOL TIME: xxxx min Only one ambient RTD allowed (n = 112) PTR Setting Out of Range Warning: Duplicate Assignment. Warning: Verify 50PnP is lower than MCM/ CWE saturation current. Save Changes (Y/N)? (n = 1 or 2) Warning: Verify LRAn is lower than MCM/ CWE saturation current Save Changes (Y/N)? (n = 1 or 2)

Overload Overload RTD Main Settings Input Mapping Short Circuit

Overload

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

ASCII Serial Communications

Overview

The 825-P Relay has the following communications interfaces: Front-panel HMI interface (see Chapter 3: Front-Panel Operation). Rear fiber-optic port RTD-RX (for fiber-optic interface to the optional external 825-PR12D RTD Scanner). This port receives the RTD measurement information from the 825-PR12D RTD Scanner. Refer to the 825-PR12D RTD Scanner Instruction Manual for information on the fiber-optic interface. PORT F communication card slot C for optional DeviceNet and Modbus network communications. PORT FFront-panel EIA-232 serial port (supports Rockwell Automation ASCII protocol). The remainder of this chapter describes the connections and commands used with the ASCII front-panel EIA-232 serial port.

ASCII Serial Port Operation

Introduction
The serial port interface provides an efficient way to communicate with the relay using a PC to review and enter the settings, access metering data, review self-test status, retrieve event summaries, and obtain motor operating statistics reports.

Required Equipment
To connect a PC serial port to the relay front-panel serial port and enter relay commands, you need the following: A personal computer equipped with one available EIA-232 serial port. A standard null-modem communication cable to connect the computer serial port to the relay serial port. Terminal emulation software to control the computer serial port. The 825-P Relay. On most personal computers, the connector for the EIA-232 serial port is a 9-pin D subconnector. You can purchase the cable to connect the computer port to the relay port from most computer hardware retailers,

4-2

ASCII Serial Communications

or you can build your own cable using the pinouts shown in Figure 4.1 on page 4.2. You can use a variety of terminal emulation programs on your PC to communicate with the 825-P. Examples of PC-based terminal emulation programs include: ProComm Plus Relay/Gold Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal SmartCOM CROSSTALK

Connect Your PC to the Relay


Connect the PC serial port to the 825-P serial port using a standard null-modem communication cable with the pinout shown in Figure 4.1. For best performance, the cable should not be more than 15 meters (50 feet) long.
Figure 4.1 Serial Cable Pinout
825-P Relay 9-Pin Male "D" Subconnector Pin Function Pin # 2 RXD TXD 3 5 GND 8 CTS *DTE Device 9-Pin Female "D" Subconnector Pin Pin # Function 3 TXD 2 RXD 5 GND 8 CTS 7 RTS 1 DCD 4 DTR 6 DSR

*DTE = Data Terminal Equipment (e.g., Computer, Terminal)

Figure 4.2 shows the front-panel EIA-232 serial port (PORT F) DB-9 connector pinout for the 825-P. Table 4.1 shows the pin functions and definitions for the serial port.
Figure 4.2 DB-9 Connector Pinout for EIA-232 Serial Ports
5 9 4 8 3 7 2 6 1

Table 4.1 Pin Functions and Definitions for EIA-232 Serial Port (Port F) Pin 1, 4, 6 2 3 5, 9 Pin Function N/C RXD, RX TXD, TX GND Definition No connection Receive data Transmit data Signal ground

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-3

Table 4.1 Pin Functions and Definitions for EIA-232 Serial Port (Port F) Pin 7 8 Pin Function RTS CTS Definition Request to send Clear to send

Configure Your Terminal Emulation Software


Personal computers use terminal emulation software to send and interpret received characters at the EIA-232 serial port. This software allows you to type letters and numbers to form commands at the computer keyboard and to see the characters you type and the relay responses on the computer screen. To ensure the PC communicates correctly with the relay, configure the terminal emulation software connection properties to match the relay serial port configuration. Configure the terminal emulation software to match the default settings shown in Table 4.2. For the best display, use VT-100 terminal emulation. If VT-100 is not available, WYSE-100 and ANSI terminal emulations also work.
Table 4.2 825-P Relay Serial Communications Default Settings Setting Speed (bps) Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Default 9600 8 N 1 XON/XOFF (software flow control)

To change the port settings, use the front-panel SET/SHOW > PORT settings menu item.

Serial Port Settings

The 825-P provides settings that allow you to configure the communication parameters for the front-panel serial port. The front-panel serial port supports only ASCII communications, described in detail in Appendix D: ASCII Port Relay Command Summary.
Table 4.3 Front-Panel Serial Port Settings Setting Prompt SPEED DATA BITS PARITY STOP BITS PORT TIMEOUT HDWR HANDSHAKING Setting Range 30038400 bps 7, 8 bits O, E, N 1, 2 bits 030 min Y, N Factory Default 9600 8 N 1 15 N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-4

ASCII Serial Communications

The 825-P front-panel serial port supports EIA-232 communication of ASCII text data. Table 4.3 shows relay serial port settings for the front-panel port. Set the Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, and Stop Bits settings to match the serial port configuration of the equipment that is communicating with the serial port. After Port Timeout minutes of inactivity on a serial port at Access Level 2, the port automatically returns to Access Level 1. This security feature helps prevent unauthorized access to the relay settings if the relay is accidentally left in Access Level 2. If you do not want the port to time out, set Timeout equal to 0 minutes. The relay EIA-232 serial ports support software (XON/XOFF) flow control. If you want to enable support for hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control, set the Enable Hardware Handshaking setting equal to Y.

Using Terminal Commands


When you type commands at the terminal emulation window, type either the entire command or just use the first three letters, e.g., the following commands instruct the relay to display metering data:
Type METER (or MET) and press Enter.

Use upper- or lower-case characters when typing commands; however, password entry is case sensitive. Table 4.5 lists user commands that the relay accepts at the EIA-232 serial port. The relay serial port uses software flow control, meaning that character transmission is controlled by receipt of XON and XOFF characters. When the relay receives the XOFF character during transmission, it pauses until it receives an XON character. If a message is not in progress when the relay receives the XOFF character, it blocks transmission of a message presented to its buffer. Messages are transmitted after the relay receives the XON character. You can send control characters from most keyboards using the keystrokes listed in Table 4.4.
Table 4.4 Serial Port Control Characters Control Characters XON XOFF CAN Key Commands Ctrl+Q Ctrl+S Ctrl+X

You can use the XOFF character to pause in the middle of long transmissions from the relay. To resume the transmission, use the XON character. To cancel a transmission in progress, use the Ctrl+X key commands.

Serial Port Access Levels


Issue commands to the relay via the front serial port, e.g., to view metering values or change the relay settings. Refer to Table 4.5 available serial port

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-5

commands. Access these commands only from the corresponding access level, as listed in the table.

Access levels are:


Access Level 0 (the lowest access level) Access Level 1 Access Level 2 (the highest access level)

Access Level 0
Once serial port communications are established with the relay, the relay displays the = prompt (an equal sign). This is referred to as Access Level 0. The only command available at Access Level 0 is the ACC command (see Table 4.5). Type ACC at the Access Level 0 prompt and then press Enter. The ACC command takes the relay to Access Level 1.

Access Level 1
The Access Level 1 commands primarily allow you to view information (such as settings and metering) but not to change settings. When the relay is in Access Level 1, the relay sends the prompt: =>. Type 2AC at the prompt and then press Enter to take the relay to Access Level 2.

Access Level 2
The Access Level 2 commands primarily allow you to change relay settings, reset data buffers, and control relay outputs. If left in Access Level 2, the serial port automatically returns to Access Level 1 after a settable inactivity period. All Access Level 1 commands are also available in Access Level 2. When the relay is in Access Level 2, the relay sends the = > > prompt at which you press Enter or after a command response is finished.

Command Summary
Table 4.5 lists the serial port commands associated with particular activities. The commands are shown in upper-case letters, but they can also be entered with lower-case letters.
Table 4.5 825-P Serial Port Command Summary Serial Port Command 2ACCESS ACCESS ANALOG DATE METER Access Level 1, 2 0, 2 2 1, 2 1, 2 Command Description Go to Access Level 2. Go to Access Level 1. Test analog output. View or Change date. Display metering data. Page Number Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.8

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-6

ASCII Serial Communications

Table 4.5 825-P Serial Port Command Summary (Continued) Serial Port Access Command Description Command Level MOTOR 1, 2 Display motor operating statistics report. MOTOR R or C 2 Reset motor operating statistics. PASSWORD 2 View or Change password. QUIT 1, 2 Go to Access Level 0. SER 1, 2 View serialized events recording data. SER R or C 1, 2 Reset serialized events recording data. SET 2 Enter or Change relay settings. SHOW 1, 2 Show/view relay settings. STATUS 1, 2 Display relay self-test status. STATUS R or C 2 Clear self-test status and restart relay. STOP 2 Stop motor. STR 2 Start motor. SUMMARY 1, 2 View event summary reports. SUMMARY R or 1, 2 Reset event summary buffer. C TARGET 1, 2 Display relay elements, inputs or outputs status. TARGET R 2 Reset trip/target LEDs. TIME 1, 2 View or Change time. Page Number Page 4.11 Page 4.11 Page 4.11 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.13 Page 4.16 Page 4.16 Page 4.18 Page 4.18 Page 4.18 Page 4.18 Page 4.19 Page 4.19 Page 4.22

The serial port command explanations that follow in the Description of Commands subsection are in alphabetical order to correspond with Table 4.5.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-7

Description of Commands

Each command explanation lists: Command. Serial port access levels where the command is available, in parentheses. Explanation of the command use or response. For example, issue the DATE command from serial port Access Level 1 or 2.

ACC and 2AC (Level 1 or 2)


The ACC and 2AC commands provide entry to the multiple access levels. Different commands are available at the different access levels, as shown in Table 4.5. Commands ACC and 2AC operate similarly: ACC command moves the relay from Access Level 0 to Access Level 1 or Access Level 2 to Access Level 1. 2AC command moves the relay from Access Level 1 to Access Level 2. The relay is shipped from the factory with the Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 passwords disabled. See PASSWORD (Level 1 or 2) on page 4-11 for information on Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 password protection. The relay sets the SALARM Relay Word bit for one second after a successful move to Access Level 2.

ANALOG (Level 2)
Use the ANALOG p t command to test the relay analog current output. When you use this command, the relay ends normal analog current output and sends a signal defined by the percentage value, p = 0100% for t minutes (t = 110 minutes). For example, when the analog output signal type is 420 mA, the command ANA 75 5.5 instructs the relay to output 16 mA (75% of full scale) for 5.5 minutes or until a character or space key is pressed to end the test. You can also use the ANALOG command to generate a current signal that increases linearly. Replace the fixed percentage value with an R to ramp the signal from zero to full scale over time. For example, the command ANA R 10 instructs the relay to ramp the analog signal from zero to full scale, reaching full scale in 10 minutes. Stop the test by pressing a keyboard character key or the space bar.

DATE (Level 1 or 2)
DATE displays the date stored by the internal calendar/clock. If the date format setting DATE_F is set to MDY, the date is displayed as month/day/year. If the date format setting is set to YMD, the date is displayed as year/month/day and for DMY it is displayed as day/month/year.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-8

ASCII Serial Communications

To set the date (and the date format setting is MDY), type DATE mm/dd/yyyy and then press Enter. To set the date for a date format setting of YMD, type DATE yyyy/mm/dd and then press Enter. To set the date for a date format setting of DMY, type DATE dd/mm/yyyy and then press Enter. You can separate the month, day, and year parameters with spaces, commas, slashes, colons, or semicolons.

METER (Level 1 or 2)
The METER commands provide access to the relay metering data. The relay divides the displayed information into two groups: Note: All ASCII command responses in this section are examples only. Your specific relay has differences based on model number, firmware revision number, and application. Instantaneous Thermal and RTD

METER k (Instantaneous Metering)


The METER k command displays instantaneous magnitudes (and angles, if applicable) of the measured and calculated analog quantities. All angles are displayed between 180 and +180 degrees. For delta-connected PTs, angles are referenced to VAB or L1 and for wye-connected PTs angles are referenced to VAN or L1. If the voltage channels are not supported, or VAB < 13V (for delta) or VAN < 13V (for wye), angles are referenced to L1 current. To view the instantaneous meter values once, use the METER command (see the example in Figure 4.3). To view the meter values k times, use the METER k command, where k is a number between 1 and 32767.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-9

Figure 4.3 METER Command Example


=>>MET 825-P Modular Prot. System L1 Current Magnitude (A) Current Angle (deg) 21.2 -42.0 L2 21.3 -162.5 21.3 0.9 0.00 -76.6 0.0 72.3 1.0 VCN 334 0.0 334 0.0 16 14 21 0.74 LAG VG 334 -119.6 334 120.8 4 -116.1 L3 21.5 78.2 Date: 03/05/2003 Time: 16:44:08.404

Average Current Magnitude (A) Motor Load (x Ie) GF Current-Core Balance (A) GF Current-Core Balance Angle (deg) GF Current-Residual (A) GF Current-Residual Angle (deg) Current Imbalance (%) VAN VBN

Voltage Magnitude L-N (V) Voltage Angle (deg) Average Phase (V) Voltage Imbalance (%) Real Power (kW) Reactive Power (kVAR) Apparent Power (kVA) Power Factor

Frequency (Hz) =>>

60.0

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-10

ASCII Serial Communications

METER T (Thermal and RTD Metering)


The METER T command displays the temperatures of any connected RTDs. This command also shows the average motor current (x Ie), the present % Thermal Capacity used, and the RTD % Thermal Capacity (if ambient and winding temperatures are monitored and a winding RTD trip temperature is set). If the motor is in overload, this command response shows the calculated time to a thermal trip. If the motor is not in overload (e.g., see Figure 4.4), the time shown is 9999 seconds. The Starts Available and Time To Reset values are also displayed.
Figure 4.4 METER T Command Example
=>>MET T 825-P Modular Prot. System Max Winding RTD = Max Bearing RTD = Ambient RTD Max Other RTD RTD 1 WDG = RTD 2 NONE RTD 3 WDG = RTD 4 WDG = 59 C 58 C = = 61 C 61 C 48 C 28 C 50 C Date: 03/05/2003 Time: 16:13:50.321

RTD 5 WDG = Open RTD 6 WDG = RTD 7 BRG = RTD 8 BRG = RTD 9 BRG = RTD 10 BRG = RTD 11 AMB = RTD 12 OTH = 57 C 48 C 46 C 45 C 44 C 28 C 50 C 0.9 32 27 9999 0

Motor Load (x Ie) Thermal Capacity Used (%) RTD % Thermal Capacity (%) Calculated Time to Thermal Trip (sec) Time to Reset (min)

=>>

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-11

MOTOR (Level 1 or 2)
The MOTOR command displays the motor operating statistics that include the following: Motor running time, stopped time, and percent time running. Total number of motor starts. Number of emergency starts. Chapter 6: Metering and Monitoring includes additional details on the motor operating statistics report. Issuing the MOTOR R or MOTOR C command from Access Level 2 clears the report.

PASSWORD (Level 1 or 2)
Note: This device is shipped with Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 password protection disabled. Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 password protection must be restored at installation. Failure to install Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 private passwords could allow unauthorized access. Rockwell Automation is not be responsible for damage resulting from unauthorized access. The Access Level 2 PAS command allows you to inspect or change the existing password. To inspect the Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 passwords, type PAS and then press Enter. The relay displays the present passwords. The factory ships the relay with the passwords disabled. For example, to change the password for Access Level 2 to BIKE, type PAS 2 BIKE and then press Enter. After entering the new password, type PAS and then press Enter to inspect it. If the password is correct, record it for future reference. If you make three incorrect password guesses, access is denied and the SALARM Relay Word bit is set for one second. The password can include up to eight characters. Valid characters consist of all printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII set typically found on the PC keyboard. The space character is not included. Strong passwords consist of eight characters, with at least one special character or digit and mixed-case sensitivity, but do not form a name, date, acronym, or word. Passwords formed in this manner are less susceptible to password guessing and automated attacks. To disable password protection for Access Level 1 or Access Level 2, set its password to DISABLE.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-12

ASCII Serial Communications

QUIT (Level 1 or 2)
The QUI command returns the relay to Access Level 0 from either Access Level 1 or Access Level 2.

SER (Level 1 or 2)
Use the SER command to view the Serialized Events Recording (SER) report, described in detail in Chapter 7: Analyzing Events. Each event record is stored with a record number, a date, and a time. You can access SER data by record number or by date. The most recent record is always record number 1. The various SER command options are shown in Table 4.6.
Table 4.6 SER Command Options Serial Port Command SER SER n SER n1 n2 SER d1 SER d1 d2 Description Display all SER records. Display the n most recent SER records starting with record n. Display SER records n2 to n1, starting with n2 Display all SER records made on date d1 Display all SER records made from dates d2 to d1, inclusive, starting with d2

The date entries used with the SER command are dependent on the Date Format setting. If the Date Format setting equals MDY, then use the format mm/dd/yyyy for entered dates. If the Date Format setting equals YMD, then use the format yyyy/mm/dd for the entered dates. If the Date Format setting equals DMY, then use the format dd/mm/yyyy for the entered dates. If the requested SER records do not exist, the relay displays the message No SER Data.

SER R or C (Level 1 and 2)


The SER R or SER C command removes the SER data from nonvolatile memory.

SET (Level 2)
The SET command allows you to view or change the relay settings.
Table 4.7 Serial Port SET Commands Command SET SET P SET M Settings Type Relay Port Relay Description Protection elements, timers, etc. Serial port settings for Serial Port F I/O mapping settings

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-13

When you issue the SET command, the relay presents a list of settings one at a time. Enter a new setting or press Enter to accept the existing setting. Editing keystrokes are shown in Table 4.8.
Table 4.8 SET Command Editing Keystrokes Do the Following Press Enter Type ^ and then press Enter Type < and then press Enter Type > and then press Enter Type END and then press Enter Press Ctrl+ X Results Retains setting and moves to next setting. Returns to previous setting. Returns to previous setting category. Moves to the next setting category. Exits editing session, then prompts you to save settings. Aborts editing session without saving changes.

The relay checks each entry to ensure that it is within the setting range. If it is not, an Out of Range message is generated, and the relay prompts you for the setting again. When all the settings are entered, the relay displays the new settings and prompts you for approval to enable them. Type Y and then press Enter to enable the new settings. The relay is disabled for as long as five seconds while it saves the new settings. The SALARM Relay Word bit is set momentarily and the ENABLE LED extinguishes while the relay is disabled. To change a specific setting, enter the command shown in Table 4.9.
Table 4.9 SET Command Format SET n s TERSE Where: n n n s is left blank to enter relay settings. is P to enter front serial port settings. is M to enter I/O mapping settings. is the short parameter name of the specific setting you want to jump to and begin setting. If s is not entered, the relay starts at the first setting (e.g., enter 50PIP to start at Short Circuit Trip level setting). (Refer to Appendix E: 825-P Settings Record, to obtain the short parameter names.) instructs the relay to skip the settings display after the last setting. Use this parameter to speed up the SET command. If you want to review the settings before saving, do not use the TERSE option.

TERSE

SHOW
Use the SHOW command to view relay settings and serial port settings (see Figure 4.5 on page 4.15). The SHOW command options are listed in Table 4.10.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-14

ASCII Serial Communications

Table 4.10 SHOW Command Options Command SHOW SHO A SHO P SHO M Description Show relay settings. Show all relay settings: enabled, disabled/hidden. Show serial port settings. Show I/O mapping settings.

You can append a setting name to each of the commands to specify the first setting to display (e.g., SHO 50P1P displays the relay settings starting with setting 50P1P). The default is the first setting. The SHOW command displays only the enabled settings. To display all the settings, including disabled/hidden settings, append an A to the SHOW command (e.g., SHOW A).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-15

Figure 4.5 SHOW Command Example


=>SHO RID :=825-P Modular TID :=Prot. System PHROT := ABC FNOM := FLA1 := 25.0 E2SPEED := VNOM := 600 DELTA_Y := E49MOTOR:= Y 49RSTMD := LRA1 := 12.0 LRTHOT1 := TCAPU := 85 TCSTART := 50P1P := OFF 50P2P := 50G1P := OFF 50G2P := LJTPU := OFF LJAPU := LLTPU := OFF LLAPU := 46UBT := OFF 46UBA := THERBL_T:= OFF START_T := OFF ESTAR_D := N MAXSTART:= OFF TBSDLY := ABSDLY := OFF E47T := N SPDSDLYT:= OFF SPDSDLYA:= EPTC := N E49RTD := Y RTDRST := TRTMP1 := 150 ALTMP1 := RTD3TY := PT100 TRTMP3 := RTD4TY := PT100 TRTMP4 := RTD5TY := PT100 TRTMP5 := RTD6TY := PT100 TRTMP6 := RTD7TY := PT100 TRTMP7 := RTD8TY := PT100 TRTMP8 := RTD9TY := PT100 TRTMP9 := RTD10TY := PT100 TRTMP10 := RTD11TY := PT100 TRTMP11 := RTD12TY := PT100 TRTMP12 := EBRGV := N ERTDBIAS:= 27P1P := OFF 27P2P := 59P1P := OFF 59P2P := NVARTP := OFF PVARTP := 37PTP := OFF 37PAP := 55LGTP := 0.50 55LDTP := 55LDAP := OFF 55AD := 81D1TP := OFF 81D1AP := 81D2TP := OFF 81D2AP := OFF LOAD := OFF AOPARM := LOAD_I BLK46 := N BLK48 := BLK37 := N BLK66 := TRIPFS := Y AUX1FS := AUX4FS := Y AUX5FS := T1ONDLY := 0 T1OFFDLY:= FP_TO := 15 FP_CONT := FP_TD := N FP_GC := FP_TH := N FP_VA := =>

60 N WYE AUTO 10.0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 10

DATE_F CTRN

:= MDY := 100 75 1.00 44 OFF

CTR1 PTR

:= 5 := 5.00 1.00 AUTO Y OFF

49RSTP := TD1 := COOLTIME:= 50N1P :=

SF := RTC1 := ETHMBIAS:= 50N2P :=

46UBAD

:= 10

PROTBL_T:= OFF

OFF

OFF AUTO 120 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF N OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF RTD1LOC RTD2LOC ALTMP3 ALTMP4 ALTMP5 ALTMP6 ALTMP7 ALTMP8 ALTMP9 ALTMP10 ALTMP11 ALTMP12 := := := := := := := := := := := := WDG OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RTD1TY := RTD3LOC := RTD4LOC := RTD5LOC := RTD6LOC := RTD7LOC := RTD8LOC := RTD9LOC := RTD10LOC:= RTD11LOC:= RTD12LOC:= EWDGV := PT100 WDG WDG WDG WDG BRG BRG BRG BRG AMB OTH N

NVARAP 55TD

:= OFF := 1

PVARAP 55LGAP

:= OFF := 0.50

N N Y Y 0 5 N N

BLK50EF := BLK49PTC:= AUX2FS := AUX6FS := T2ONDLY := FP_LA FP_PE

N N Y Y 0

BLK50P := N BLK49RTD:= N AUX3FS := Y T2OFFDLY:= 0 FP_MF FP_RTD := N := N

:= N := N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-16

ASCII Serial Communications

STATUS (Level 1 or 2)
The STATUS command displays the relay hardware and software self-test diagnostics and resolves hardware configuration conflicts when detected (see Figure 4.6 on page 4.17). To view a status report, enter the STATUS command. To view the status report k times, enter the command STATUS k, where k is a number between 1 and 32767. Table 4.11 shows the status report definitions and message formats for each test.
Table 4.11 STATUS Command Report and Definitions STATUS Report Designator FID CID Identity Code Definition Firmware identifier string Firmware checksum identifier Relay configuration identification Message Format (FID string) xxxx Identity string OK/WARN OK/WARN OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/WARN OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/WARN OK/WARN OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL OK/FAIL xxxxxx xxxx xxxxx ___ kbps 000b bbbb

Current Offset DC offset in hardware circuits of current channels (L1, L2, L3, RES, CB) Voltage Offset (VA, VB, VC) PS_Vdc FPGA GPSB HMI RAM ROM CR_RAM Non_Vol Clk_Bat Clock PTC RTD MCM/CWE Voltage I/O_Crd COM_Crd MAC ID ASA DN_Rate DN_Status DC offset in hardware circuits of voltage channels Power supply status FPGA programming unsuccessful, or FPGA failed General Purpose Serial Bus Front-Panel FGPA programming unsuccessful, or Front-Panel FPGA failed Volatile memory integrity Firmware integrity Integrity of settings in RAM and code that runs in RAM Integrity of data stored in nonvolatile memory Clock battery integrity Clock functionality Integrity of PTC Integrity of RTD module/communications Integrity of current board and MCM/CWE Integrity of voltage board Integrity of I/O card Integrity of DeviceNet card and network DeviceNet card specific card identification. Manufacturer identifier for DeviceNet. DeviceNet card network communications data speed DeviceNet connection and fault status.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-17

Figure 4.6 STATUS Command Example


=>>STA 825-P Modular Prot. System Date: 03/03/2003 Time: 11:54:40.361

FID=825-P-R100-V0-Z001001-D20030225 Identity Code 1522001BCX0X1X1X SELF TESTS Current Offset: Voltage Offset: PS_Vdc OK RAM OK PTC OK MAC_ID 0 L1 OK VA OK FPGA OK ROM OK RTD Ok L2 OK VB OK GPSB Ok CR_RAM OK MCM/CWE OK L3 OK VC OK HMI Ok Non_Vol OK Clk_Bat Ok Clock OK RES OK CB OK

CID=010C

OK

Voltage OK

I/O_Crd OK

Com_Crd

ASA 0000 0000h

DN_Rate 0kbps

DN_Status 0000 0000

Relay Enabled =>>

Figure 4.7 Identity Code Explanation


1552001BAX0X0A0X

Converter Module X None A 825-MCM2 B 825-MCM5 C 825-MCM20 D 825-MCM180 E 825-MCM420 F 825-MCM630N

Communication Card 0 None 3 DeviceNet

Expansion I/O Card 0 None 1 Installed

Voltage Sensing Card 0 None 1 Installed

Note: Refer to Figure 4.6

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-18

ASCII Serial Communications

Figure 4.8 DN_Status Explanation

0 0 0 0 Undefined I/O Idle I/O Fault Explicit Fault I/O Connection Explicit Connection

0 0 0 0

Note: Refer to Figure 4.6

STATUS R or C (Level 2)
To reset the self-test status and restart the relay, enter the STA R command from Access Level 2. The relay then restarts (like powering down and then powering up the relay) and all diagnostics are rerun before the relay is enabled.

STOP (Level 2)
The STOP command causes the relay to trip, opening the motor contactor or circuit breaker and stopping the motor. For more details refer to Chapter 5: Protection and Logic Functions.

STR (Level 2)
The STR (START) command initiates a motor start using the relay's internal logic. For more details refer to Chapter 5: Protection and Logic Functions.

SUMMARY (Level 1 or 2)
The SUM n command displays a summary list, in reverse chronological order, of all the archived event summary reports (maximum of five events). An example event summary report is in Figure 4.9. Each event summary report shows the date, time, current magnitudes (primary values) and, if the relay has the voltage option, voltage magnitudes (primary values). The current and voltage values are at the trigger instant. The event summary report also shows the event type (e.g., OVERLOAD TRIP). The n parameter with the SUM n command can have a value up to 5 and defines the number of events requested. If n is not specified, then up to five of the most recent reports are listed. For more information on events, refer to Chapter 7: Analyzing Events.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-19

Figure 4.9 SUMMARY Command Example


=>>SUM 2 825-P Modular Prot. System Event #: 1 Event Date: 01/29/2003 CURRENT MAG (A) 0.00 Event #: 2 Event Date: 01/29/2003 CURRENT MAG (A) 0.00 =>> Date: 02/04/2003 Time: 17:20:46.439

Event: OVERLOAD TRIP Event Time: 14:14:01.930 L1 L2 L3 8.2 8.1 8.2 Event: OVERLOAD TRIP Event Time: 14:13:05.931 L1 L2 L3 8.2 8.2 8.2

RES 0.0

CB

RES 0.0

CB

SUMMARY R (Level 1 and 2)


The SUMMARY R command clears all the events in the event buffer.

TARGET (Level 1 or 2)
The TARGET command displays the status of relay elements whether they are asserted or de-asserted. The elements are represented as Relay Word bits and are listed in rows of eight, called Relay Word rows. For additional information on individual Relay Word bits, refer to Appendix C: Relay Word Bits. A Relay Word bit is either at logical 1 (asserted) or at logical 0 (de-asserted). The TAR command options are listed in Table 4.12.
Table 4.12 TARGET Command Options Commands TAR n k Descriptions Shows Relay Word Row n (010). k is an optional parameter to specify the number of times (132767) to repeat the Relay Word row display. If k is not specified, the Relay Word row is displayed once. See Table 4.13 for the definition of Row 0. See Table 4.14 for a list of the Relay Word bits in each row (n = 110). Shows the Relay Word bit row containing the Relay Word bit name (e.g., TAR 50P1T displays Relay Word Row 1). Valid names are shown in Table 4.14. k is an optional parameter to specify the number of times (132767) to repeat the Relay Word bit row display. If k is not specified, the Relay Word row is displayed once.

TAR name k

Table 4.13 Front-Panel LEDs and the TAR 0 Command LED Number/ State 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-20

ASCII Serial Communications

Table 4.13 Front-Panel LEDs and the TAR 0 Command ALARM (Flashing) ON Steady (Latched) N/A ENABLE WARNING TRIP N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Table 4.14 825-P Relay Word and Corresponding TAR Command TAR 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 Description 49T Overload Trip LOSSTRIP Undercurrent Trip JAMTRIP Jam Trip 49UBT Current Imbalance Trip 50P1T Short Circuit Trip RTDT RTD (Winding/Bearng) Trip PTCTRIP PCT Trip 50G1T Ground Fault (Residual) Trip VART VAR Trip 37PT Underpower Trip 27P1T Undervoltage Trip 59P1T Overvoltage Trip 47T Phase ReversalTrip 55T Power Factor Trip SPDSTR Speed Switch Trip 50N1T Ground Fault (Core Balance) Trip SMTRIP Start Time Trip 81D1T Frequency 1Trip 81D2T Frequency 2Trip OTHTRIP RTD (Other) Trip AMBTRIP RTD (Ambient) Trip PTCFLT PTC ErrorTrip RTDFLT RTD ErrorTrip MCMFLT MCM ErrorTrip COMMIDLE Comm Idle Trip COMMLOSS Comm Loss Trip REMTRIP Remote Trip COMMFLT Comm Fault Trip Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 49A Overload Warning LOSSALRM Undercurrent Warning JAMALRM Jam Warning 46UBA Current Imbalance Warning RTDA RTD (Winding/Bearing) Warning 55A Power Factor Warning

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-21

Table 4.14 825-P Relay Word and Corresponding TAR Command TAR 1 0 50N2T 50G2T Description Ground Fault (Core Balance) Warning Ground Fault (Residual) Warning

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

10

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

VARA 37PA 27P2T 59P2T SPDSAL 81D1A 81D2A OTHALRM AMBALRM SALARM WARNING LOADUP LOADLOW TIMER1T TIMER2T 50P2T STOPPED RUNNING STARTING STAR DELTA START Reserved Reserved IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 Reserved Reserved Reserved TRIP AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 Reserved

VAR Warning Underpower Warning Undervoltage Warning Overvoltage Warning Speed Switch Warning Frequency 1 Warning Frequency 2 Warning RTD (Other) Warning RTD (Ambient) Warning Setting Warning General Warning Load Control (Upper) Load Control (Lower) Timer 1 Timer 2 Short Circuit Warning Stopped State Running State Starting State Star (Wye) Starting State Delta Starting State Start Command

Input 1 State Input 2 State Input 3 State Input 4 State Input 5 State

Trip Relay State Auxiliary Relay 1 State Auxiliary Relay 2 State Auxiliary Relay 3 State Auxiliary Relay 4 State Auxiliary Relay 5 State Auxiliary Relay 6 State

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-22

ASCII Serial Communications

TARGET R (Level 2)
The TARGET R command resets the front-panel tripping targets and releases the trip signal if the fault condition has vanished and lockout conditions are not present. If you issue the TARGET R command at the relay serial port or use the front-panel Test/Reset push button and the relay tripping targets do not reset, verify that the fault condition and all lockouts have cleared.

TIME (Level 1 or 2)
The TIME command displays the relay clock (24 hours). To set the clock, type TIME hh:mm:ss and then press Enter. Separate the hours, minutes, and seconds with colons, semicolons, spaces, commas, or slashes. For example, set 22:47:36 by typing TIME 22:47:36 and then pressing Enter:

View or Change Settings With Front-Panel Serial Port

View Settings
Use the SHOW command to view relay settings. The SHOW command is available from Access Level 1 and Access Level 2. Table 4.15 lists the SHOW command options.
Table 4.15 SHOW Command Options Command SHOW SHO A SHO P SHO M Description Show relay settings. Show all relay settings: enabled, disabled/hidden. Show front serial port settings. Show I/O mapping settings.

You can append a setting name to each of the commands to specify the first setting to display (e.g., SHO 50P1P displays the relay settings starting with setting 50P1P). The default is the first setting. The SHOW command displays only the enabled settings. To display all the settings, including disabled/hidden settings, append an A to the SHOW command (e.g., SHOW A).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

ASCII Serial Communications

4-23

Enter Settings
The SET command (available from Access Level 2) allows you to view or change the settings. Table 4.16 lists the SET command options.
Table 4.16 SET Command Options Command SET SET P SET M Settings Type Relay Port Relay Description Protection elements, timers, etc. Settings for front-panel Serial Port F. Input/output mapping settings.

When you issue the SET command, the relay presents a list of settings one at a time. Enter a new setting or press <Enter> to accept the existing setting. Editing keystrokes are listed in Table 4.17.
Table 4.17 SET Command Editing Keystrokes Do the Following Press Enter Type ^ and press Enter Type < and press Enter Type > and press Enter Type END and press Enter Press Ctrl+ X Results Retains setting and moves to next setting. Returns to previous setting. Returns to previous setting category. Moves to next setting category. Exits editing session, then prompts you to save settings. Aborts editing session without saving changes.

The relay checks each entry to ensure that the entry is within the setting range. If it is not in range, an Out of Range message is generated, and the relay prompts you for the setting again. When all the settings are entered, the relay displays the new settings and prompts you for approval to enable them. Type Y and then press Enter to enable the new settings. The relay is disabled for as long as 5 seconds while it saves the new settings. The ALARM Relay Word bit is set momentarily and the Enable LED extinguishes while the relay is disabled. The relay also runs interdependency checks between some parameters. If it detects a configuration error between parameters a message is displayed and the user is prompted to change settings to eliminate error before settings can be saved.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

4-24

ASCII Serial Communications

To change a specific setting, enter the command shown in Table 4.18.


Table 4.18 SET Command Format SET n s TERSE Where: n n n s is left blank to enter RELAY settings. is P to enter front-panel serial port settings. is M to enter I/O mapping settings. is the name of the specific setting you want to jump to and begin setting. If s is not entered, the relay starts at the first setting (e.g., enter 50P1P to start at Short Circuit Trip level setting). instructs the relay to skip the settings display after the last setting. Use this parameter to speed up the SET command. If you want to review the settings before saving, do not use the TERSE option.

TERSE

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Protection and Logic Functions

Overview

This chapter describes the 825-P Relay settings, including the motor protection elements and basic functions, control I/O mapping, as well as the settings that control the communications ports and front-panel displays. Note: Each 825-P is shipped with default factory settings. Calculate the settings for your motor to ensure secure and dependable protection. Document and enter the settings using the worksheets provided in Appendix E - 825-P Settings Record. This chapter includes the following subsections: Application Data lists information that is required about the protected motor before calculating the relay settings. Main Settings lists settings that configure the relay inputs to accurately measure and interpret the AC current and optional voltage input signals. Basic Motor Protection lists settings for protection elements included in all models of the 825-P, including the thermal element, overcurrent elements, load-loss functions, and load-jam functions. RTD-Based Protection lists settings associated with the RTD inputs (requires RTD Scanner Module). Skip this subsection if your application does not include RTD measuring. Voltage-Based Protection (Relays With Voltage Inputs) lists settings associated with the optional AC voltage-based protection elements. You can skip this subsection if your relay is not equipped with optional voltage inputs. I/O Configuration lists settings for the front-panel display control, control inputs/outputs, and analog output for all relay models. Serial Port Settings lists settings that configure the relay front- and rear-panel serial ports. DeviceNet Port Settings lists settings that configure the relay rear-panel DeviceNet port. Selected Relay Logic Diagrams show selected logic diagrams for protection, control, and outputs. When you calculate the protection element settings to protect your motor, proceed through the subsections listed earlier. Skip the RTD- and voltage-based protection subsections if they do not apply to your specific relay model or installation. As you calculate settings, record them on a

5-2

Protection and Logic Functions

photocopy of the settings worksheets. (See Appendix E: 825-P Settings Record for more information.) DeviceNet port parameters can only be set at the rear of the relay on the DeviceNet card (see Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.3). You can enter settings using the front-panel SET RELAY function (see Chapter 3: Front-Panel Operation), the front-panel serial port (see Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications), or the rear-panel DeviceNet port.

Application Data

It is quicker and easier for you to calculate settings for the 825-P if you collect the following information before you begin (collect the information for each speed for a two-speed motor application): Specifications of the protected motor, including the following details: Rated full load current. Service factor. Locked rotor current. Maximum locked rotor time with the motor at ambient and/or operating temperature. Maximum motor starts per hour, if known. Minimum time between motor starts, if known. Additional data regarding the motor application, including the following information: Minimum no load current or power, if known. Motor accelerating time. This is the normal time required for the motor to reach full speed. Maximum time to reach motor full load. Note: This time could be significantly longer than the motor accelerating time, particularly in pump motor applications where the motor could run at full speed for some time before the pump reaches full head and full load. Current transformer primary and secondary ratings and connections, if used. System phase rotation and nominal frequency. Voltage transformer ratios and connections, if used. Type and location of resistance temperature devices (RTDs), if used. Expected fault current magnitudes for motor or cable ground and three-phase faults.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-3

Main Settings

Identifier Settings
All models of the 825-P have the identifier settings described in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Identifier Settings
Setting Prompt UNIT ID LINE 1 UNIT ID LINE 2 Setting Range 16 Characters 16 Characters Factory Default 825-P Modular Prot. System

The 825-P prints the Relay and Terminal Identifier strings at the top of responses to serial port commands to identify messages from individual relays. Enter up to 16 characters, including capital letters AZ, numbers 09, periods (.), dashes (-), and spaces. Suggested identifiers include the location, process, circuit, size, or equipment number of the protected motor.

Phase Rotation, Nominal Frequency Settings


Table 5.2 Phase Rotation, Nominal Frequency Settings
Setting Prompt PHASE ROTATION RATED FREQ. DATE FORMAT Setting Range ABC, ACB 50, 60 Hz MDY, YMD, DMY Factory Default ABC 60 MDY

The phase rotation setting tells the relay your phase labeling standard. Set Phase Rotation equal to ABC when B-phase current lags A-phase current by 120. Set Phase Rotation equal to ACB when B-phase current leads A-phase current by 120.
Figure 5.1 Phase Rotation Setting
C B

A PHROT = ABC PHROT = ACB

Set the Rated Freq. equal to your system nominal frequency. The Date Format setting allows you to change the relay date presentation format to either North American standard (Month/Day/Year), engineering standard (Year/Month/Day), or European standard (Day/Month/Year).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-4

Protection and Logic Functions

Current Transformer (CT) Configuration, Full Load Current Settings


Table 5.3 CT Configuration and Full Load Current Settings
Setting Prompt PHASE CT RATIO MOTOR FLA (Ie) TWO SPEED ENABLE CT RATIO2nd MOTOR FLA2nd CORE B. CT RATIO Setting Range 15000 0.55000 A Y, N 15000 0.55000 A 12000 Factory Default 1 0.5 N 1 0.5 100

Note the following: Motor FLA settings are in Primary Amperes. The allowed setting range is dependent on the MCM module that is connected to the relay. The MOTOR FLA and PHASE CT RATIO setting ranges will be a subset of the full ranges shown in Table 5.3. When Two Speed Enable = Y and a Speed 2 control input is specified, the relay uses CT Ratio-2nd and Motor FLA-2nd for the overload thermal model. CTs with a 1 or 5 A rated secondary current can be used with the Converter Module MCM2 or MCM20, respectively. If another MCM module is used, the relay automatically sets CT Ratios = 1. The CT ratio and full load current settings, along with the connected MCM module, configure the relay to accurately scale measured values and report the primary quantities. Calculate the phase and neutral CT ratios by dividing the primary rating by the secondary rating. The relay runs interdependency checks on the FLA and CT ratios based upon the ratings of the MCM module that is connected. If a value is set that violates the interdependency rules, then the user will be prompted to adjust settings to eliminate conflicts. EXAMPLE

Phase CT Ratio Setting Calculation:


Consider an application where Phase CT Rating = 100:5A. Set the CT Ratio :=100/5 := 20

Voltage Transformer (VT) Configuration Settings


Relays that are not equipped with phase voltage inputs hide these settings and disable voltage-based protection and metering functions.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-5

Table 5.4 shows voltage settings for relay models with optional voltage inputs.
Table 5.4 Voltage Settings
Setting Prompt PHASE VT RATIO LINE VOLTAGE XFMR CONNECTION Setting Range 1.00250.00 10030000V Delta, Wye Factory Default 34.65 4160 Delta

Note: The line voltage setting is in primary volts. These settings configure the optional relay voltage inputs to correctly measure and scale the voltage signals. Calculate the Phase VT Ratio by dividing the primary rating by the secondary rating. EXAMPLE

Phase VT Ratio Setting Calculation:


Consider a Phase VT Ratio Setting calculation, consider a 4000V motor application where 4200:120V rated voltage transformers (connected in open delta) are used. Set the VT Ratio := 4200/120 := 35 and DELTA_Y := Delta When phase-to-phase VTs are connected to the relay, set XFMR Connection equal to Delta. When phase-to-neutral potentials are connected to the relay, set XFMR Connection equal to Wye.

Basic Motor Protection

IMPORTANT

Settings associated with options or accessories (converter module, voltage input card, expansion I/O card, RTD scanner) require their installation or connection prior to being made available for configuration.

ATTENTION

Configuration of protection elements is not complete until the elements are assigned to the trip or auxiliary relays. Refer to I/O Assignments on page 5-30 for instructions.

Overload (Thermal Model)


The 825-P motor thermal element provides integrated protection for all of the following motor operating conditions:

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-6

Protection and Logic Functions

Locked Rotor Starts Running Overload Imbalance Current/Negative-Sequence Current Heating Repeated or Frequent Starting

Note: You can set Run State Time Constant of the thermal overload curve. If not known, set t to Auto; the relay configures the overload curve continuous with the locked rotor curve. When overload protection is enabled, the relay configures a thermal curve based on the motor Full Load Amps, Service Factor, Locked Rotor Amps, Hot Locked Rotor Time, and Acceleration Factor settings. See Figure 5.5 for selected settings of Thermal Overload curves. The relay operates a thermal model with a trip value defined by the relay settings and a present heat estimate that varies with time and changing motor current. The relay expresses the present motor thermal estimate as a % Thermal Capacity. When the % Thermal Capacity reaches 100%, the relay trips. You can see the present % Thermal Capacity value using the relay front-panel METER > THERMAL function or the serial port METER T command. If the thermal model is turned off (Overload Enable := N), the thermal model is disabled, the output of the thermal model is blocked, and the relay reports the % Thermal Capacity as 999 as noted in Chapter 6: Metering and Monitoring.
Table 5.5 Overload (Thermal Model) Settings
Setting Prompt OVERLOAD ENABLE OL RESET MODE OL RESET LEVEL SERVICE FACTOR MOTOR LRC LOCKD ROTOR TIME ACCEL FACTOR RUN STATE TIME K MOTOR LRC2nd MOTOR LRT2nd ACCEL FACT2nd RUN ST TC2nd OL WARN LEVEL START INH. LEVEL STOP COOL TIME OL RTD BIASING Setting Range Y, N Man, Auto 1099%TCU 1.011.50 2.512.0 x Ie 1.0600.0 s 0.101.50 Auto, 12000 min 2.512.0 x Ie 1.0600.0 s 0.101.50 Auto, 12000 min Off, 5099%TCU Off, 199%TCU 12200 min Y, N Factory Default Y Man 75 1.01 6.0 10.0 1.00 Auto 6.0 10.0 1.00 Auto 85 Off 18 N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-7

IMPORTANT

For compliance to IEC standards regarding thermal overload protection, set the SERVICE FACTOR to a value: 1.051.20.

When you enable overload protection, the relay requests information about the protected motor capabilities. Obtain the requested information (except the acceleration factor) from the motor specifications. The 825-P thermal element always operates in one of two modes: starting and running. In starting mode, the thermal element trips in Locked Rotor Time at Locked Rotor Current whether the motor is at ambient or at normal operating temperature. In running mode, the thermal element provides overload protection by limiting the motor heat energy estimate to a value represented by the overload settings. The locked rotor time setting is for a hot motor condition. If only one locked rotor time is specified for a particular motor, unless the specification states otherwise, assume the time is the cold locked rotor time. Multiply the cold locked rotor time by 0.833 to determine a hot locked rotor time that is acceptable for most motors. Note: When Two Speed Enable = Y and a Speed 2 control input is specified, the relay uses the 2nd FLA-related settings for the overload thermal model. EXAMPLE

Thermal Element Setting


A 4000V 600 Hp motor is protected using the 825-P Thermal Overload Element. Motor data sheet includes the following: Rated Horsepower = 600 Hp Rated Voltage = 4000V Rated Full Load Current = 80 A Rated Locked Rotor Amps = 480 A Safe Stall Time at 100% Volts: Cold = 18 seconds Hot = 15 seconds Service Factor = 1.2 Phase current transformers with 100:5 A rating and the MCM20 module are selected for application. 825-P settings for application are calculated as shown below: Current Transformer Ratio: := 100/5 := 20 (see Main Settings on page 5.3)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-8

Protection and Logic Functions

Full Load Amps (Ie): := 80 A primary (see Main Settings on page 5.3) Service Factor: := 1.2 Locked Rotor Amps: := 480.0/80.0 := 6.0 x Ie Hot Locked Rotor Time: := 15.0 seconds Run state time constant: := Auto Note: To prevent nuisance tripping from occurring when a motor operates at rated service factor, set Service Factor to 0.01 plus the motor nameplate value. If the Locked Rotor Ampere rating for the motor is unknown, but the motor has a Motor Code designation, use the following table as provided by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer Association) to determine the locked rotor ampere value.
Table 5.6 Motor Codes
Letter Designation A B C D E F G H J K

kVA/HP 03.15 3.153.55 3.554.0 4.04.5 4.55.0 5.05.6 5.66.3 6.37.1 7.18.0 8.09.0

Letter Designation L M N P R S T U V

kVA/HP 9.010.0 10.011.2 11.212.5 12.514.0 14.016.0 16.018.0 18.020.0 20.022.4 22.4 and up

Locked kVA per horsepower range includes the lower figure up to, but not including, the higher figure; e.g., 3.14 is designated by letter A and 3.15 is designated by letter B.

The Acceleration Factor setting reduces or extends the allowed accelerating time under locked rotor conditions. You can always safely set this value equal to 1.00. If you know that the driven load always accelerates in less than the rated locked rotor time, you could use a factor less than 1.00 to provide a faster trip in locked rotor conditions. Do not, however, set the value greater than 1.00, except to allow a start with a longer than normal accelerating time (e.g., high inertia motor application, emergency condition). For settings greater than 1.00, use the information in Table 5.19 to provide locked rotor protection.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-9

EXAMPLE

Acceleration Factor Setting Calculation:


In a particular application, a motor with a 10 second hot-locked rotor time always starts in 5 seconds. Setting the TD1 equal to 0.75 causes the relay to trip in 7.5 seconds under locked rotor conditions. This setting allows ample time for the motor to start, but does not subject the motor to the full 10 seconds of locked rotor current if a locked rotor start attempt takes place. When the motor thermal capacity used exceeds the Overload Warning Level setting, the relay issues a warning. The early warning could allow you to correct the load problem before a thermal trip occurs. The motor tripping and starting functions include supervision to help prevent a thermal trip on a normal start. The relay prevents motor starting until the thermal element has enough available thermal capacity to allow a motor start without tripping. Set START INH. LEVEL to a value equal to the incremental increase in percent thermal capacity utilized for one start plus additional margin. The 825-P allows a new start when the percent thermal capacity utilized value is below 100 - START INH. LEVEL. This feature can be disabled by setting START INH. LEVEL equal to Off. A stopped motor could take longer to cool than a running motor because of reduced airflow or loss of forced coolant. The equation used is:
COOLTIME = 0.03 k LRTHOTn (LRAn)2 minutes

where: n = 1 or 2 (select the one that gives higher COOLTIME) k > 1.0 Round up the result to the next integer. The value k = 1.0 yields stop cool time equal to run cool time. The factory default settings assume that the motor stopped cooling time is approximately the same as the motor running cooling time. Calculate the STOP COOL TIME setting for your application using the value that you want for k > 1.0. Motor running and stopped cooling times or time constants could be provided by the motor manufacturer. If a time constant is provided, multiply that value by 3 to calculate the STOP COOL TIME setting. OL RESET MODE determines the reset mode for the overload element. If set to Auto, the overload trip resets automatically when the element resets, provided no other trip conditions are present. If set to Manual, operator intervention is required to reset the overload trip. OL RESET LEVEL determines the Thermal Capacity Utilized (%TCU) Level below which the relay allows Reset (Automatic or Manual) following an overload trip.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-10

Protection and Logic Functions

You can bias the Thermal Model by ambient temperature when OL RTD BIASING is set equal to Y. The Overload RTD Bias is calculated using the ambient temperature above 40C and Winding RTD Trip temperature setting. Note: In addition to setting OL RTD BIASING := Y, you must set one RTD Location equal to Ambient, at least one RTD Location equal to Winding, and set the Winding Trip Level (see Table 5.21 for details).

Short Circuit
Table 5.7 Short Circuit Settings
Setting Prompt SC TRIP LEVEL SC TRIP DELAY SC WARN LEVEL SC WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 4.0012.00 x Ie 0.005.00 s Off, 4.0012.00 x Ie 0.005.00 s Factory Default Off 0.00 Off 0.50

If the 825-P is connected to a motor protected by a fused contactor, disable the short circuit element by setting its Trip level to Off. If the relay is connected to a device capable of interrupting fault current, use the element to detect and trip for short circuit faults. Set the Short Circuit Trip Level to a value greater than the motor locked rotor current rating. Set the Short Circuit Warn Level to the value that you want with appropriate time delay. Note: The 825-P Short Circuit elements normally operate using the output of a cosine filter algorithm. During heavy fault currents when the relay detects severe MCM/CT saturation the overcurrent elements operate on the output of a bipolar peak detector. Based on the level of a harmonic distortion index, the short circuit overcurrent elements operate on either the output of the cosine filter or the output of the bipolar peak detector. When the harmonic distortion index exceeds the fixed threshold that indicates severe MCM/CT saturation, the short circuit overcurrent elements operate on the output of the bipolar peak detector. When the harmonic distortion index is below the fixed threshold, the short circuit overcurrent elements operate on the output of the cosine filter. The cosine filter provides excellent performance in removing DC offset and harmonics. However, the bipolar peak detector has the best performance in situations of severe MCM/CT saturation when the cosine filter magnitude estimation is significantly degraded. Combining the two filters ensures dependable short circuit overcurrent element operation.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-11

Ground Fault

Basic Information
Table 5.8 Ground FaultCore Balance Settings
Setting Prompt GF-CB TRIP LEVEL GF-CB TRIP DELAY GF-CB WARN LEVEL GF-CB WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 0.0125.00 A 0.005.00 s Off, 0.0125.00 A 0.0120.0 s Factory Default Off 0.00 Off 10.0

Note: GF-CB Trip Level settings are in Primary Amperes. The relay offers two types of ground fault detecting elements. The core balance (CB) elements operate using current measured through an external core balance (zero sequence) CT. The residual (RES) elements operate using a residual ground fault measurement from the MCM module. While the ground fault trip and warning levels offer an overall range of 0.125 A, the actual input circuitry has a dynamic sensing range of 5500 mA. Determine the range (in terms of primary amps) that is valid for a given application by multiplying the input sensing range of 5500 mA by the turns ratio of the core balance sensor. For information about corresponding valid ground fault setting ranges for typical sensors, see for Table 5.9.
Table 5.9 Ground Fault Sensor-to-Settings Correlation
Ground Fault Sensor Ratio 1:1 50:5 100:1 2000:1 Valid Setting Range 0.010.50 A 0.105.00 A 1.0025.00 A 20.0025.00

When a ground fault CT is connected to the 825-P, as in Figure 2.13, use the Core Balance ground fault element to detect motor ground faults. Calculate the Trip and Warn level settings based on the available ground fault current and the Core Balance CT ratio. EXAMPLE

Ground Fault Core Balance CT Application:


A resistance-grounded transformer limits current for motor or cable ground faults. The resistor is sized to limit current to 10 A primary. The three motor leads are passed through the window of a 10:1 core balance CT. The CT secondary is connected to 825-P CBCT input terminals, as shown in Figure 5.2. Setting the core balance CT Ratio equal to 10 and Ground Fault Trip Level equal to 5 A with 0.10 second time delay ensures that the element quickly detects and trips for motor ground faults, but prevents faulty operation due to unequal breaker or contactor pole closing times.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-12

Protection and Logic Functions

Figure 5.2 Ground Fault Protection Using Core Balance CT


S1 S2

1A

Motor

10 A

10:1 Window CT

10 A C-Ground Fault

Table 5.10 Ground FaultResidual Settings


Setting Prompt GF-RES TRIP LEVL GF-RES TRIP DLAY GF-RES WARN LEVL GF-RES WARN DLAY Setting Range Off, 0.101.00 x Ie 0.005.00 s Off, 0.101.00 x Ie 0.0120.0 s Factory Default Off 0.50 Off 10.0

Note: Phase CT ratios are typically higher than CB CT ratios. For this reason, the relay sensitivity to motor ground faults is less when the residual overcurrent element is used instead of the CB element. A separate ground fault detection method should be used if a CB CT is not available in applications where resistance grounding reduces the available ground fault current. For solidly grounded systems, the residual ground fault elements can be used.

Jam
Table 5.11 Jam Settings
Setting Prompt JAM TRIP LEVEL JAM TRIP DELAY JAM WARN LEVEL JAM WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 1.006.00 x Ie 0.0120.0 s Off, 1.006.00 x Ie 0.0120.0 s Factory Default Off 5.0 Off 10.0

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-13

When the motor is running, the relay offers jam detection. When the motor load jams, stalling the motor, the phase current increases to near the locked rotor value. When Load Jam Tripping is enabled, if the phase current exceeds the Load Jam Trip Level setting for longer than the time delay setting, the relay trips. Set the Load Jam Trip Level greater than the expected normal load current but less than the rated locked rotor current. This setting is entered in per unit of the Full Load Amps (Ie) setting.

Undercurrent (Load Loss)


Table 5.12 Undercurrent Settings
Setting Prompt UC TRIP LEVEL UC TRIP DELAY UC WARN LEVEL UC WARN DELAY UC START INHIBIT Setting Range Off, 0.101.00 x Ie 0.0120.0 s Off, 0.101.00 x Ie 0.0120.0 s 01500 s Factory Default Off 5.0 Off 10.0 0

The relay arms the load-loss detection logic after the motor starts, as defined by the Undercurrent Start Inhibit time delay setting. Set this delay to allow pumps or compressors to reach normal load. Once armed, this function issues a warning or trip if phase current drops below warn or trip level for the specified time delay. Set the Undercurrent Trip and Warn Levels greater than the expected motor no load current, but less than the minimum current expected when the motor is operating normally. These settings are entered in per unit of the Full Load Amps (Ie) setting. If you expect the motor to normally operate at no load, disable the Trip and Warn elements. The relay automatically hides the associated time delay settings.

Current Imbalance/Phase Loss


Table 5.13 Current Imbalance Settings
Setting Prompt CI TRIP LEVEL CI TRIP DELAY CI WARN LEVEL CI WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 580% 0240 s Off, 580% 0240 s Factory Default Off 5 10 10

Imbalanced motor terminal voltages cause imbalanced stator currents to flow in the motor. The negative-sequence current component of the imbalance current causes significant rotor heating. While the 825-P motor thermal element models the heating effect of the negative-sequence current, you could

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-14

Protection and Logic Functions

want the additional imbalance and single-phasing protection offered by a current imbalance element. The 825-P calculates percent imbalance current in one of two ways, depending on the magnitude of the average current: 1. When the average current, Iav, is greater than the motor-rated full load current, the relay calculates the percent imbalance:
( Im Iav )UB% = 100 --------------------------Iav

2. When the average current is less than the motor-rated full load current, the relay calculates the percent imbalance:
( Im Iav )UB% = 100 --------------------------FLA

where: UB% = Current imbalance percentage Im Iav = Magnitude of phase current with largest deviation from average = Magnitude of the average phase current

FLA = Motor-rated full load current

In either case, the function is disabled if the average phase current magnitude is less than 25% of the Full Load Amps setting. A 1% voltage imbalance typically causes approximately 6% current imbalance in induction motors. If a 2% voltage imbalance can occur in your location, set the current imbalance Warn Level greater than 12% to prevent nuisance alarms. A 15% current imbalance Warn Level setting corresponds to an approximately 2.5% voltage imbalance, and a 20% current imbalance trip setting corresponds to an approximately 3.3% voltage imbalance. A 10-second alarm delay and 5-second trip delay should provide adequate performance in most applications.

Protection Disable
Table 5.14 Protection Disable Settings
Setting Prompt PROT INHIBIT TIME OL INHIBIT TIME Setting Range Off, 1240 s Off, 1240 s Factory Default Off Off

ATTENTION

!
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

The protection can be seriously jeopardized when either of the Inhibit Time settings is used. For most applications, set the value of PROT INHIBIT TIME and OL INHIBIT TIME to Off.

Protection and Logic Functions

5-15

You can disable Trip and Warning levels of preselected protection elements for a set time delay during motor Starting. Set the Protection Inhibit Time for a delay to disable Undercurrent, Short Circuit, Current Imbalance, Ground Fault, and Undervoltage elements. Set the Overload Inhibit Time for a delay to disable the Overload (Thermal Model) element. If you are using the time delay settings, keep them as short as possible. Note: The 825-P determines the motor state (Starting, Running, or Stopped) primarily based on the motor current.

Start Monitoring
Table 5.15 Start Monitor Settings
Setting Prompt START MOTOR TIME Setting Range Off, 1240 s Factory Default Off

Note: With Star-Delta (Wye-Delta) starting, the total starting time (Star and Delta) is monitored. If immediate tripping is required in the event of stalling, monitoring must be provided by a Speed Switch Function. If motor starting has not finished by the set time, the relay produces a trip. The start monitoring is independent of the overload protection provided by the thermal model. Figure 5.3 shows the typical current during motor start and the Start Motor Time setting.
Figure 5.3 Monitoring Starting Time

I 1.2 Ie 1 3

1.1 Ie

2 t tv 1 = Motor starting current 2 = Rated conditions tv = Start Motor Time 3 = Tripping if starting lasts too long

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-16

Protection and Logic Functions

Star-Delta (Wye-Delta) Starting


T

Table 5.16 Star-Delta Settings


Setting Prompt STAR-DELTA ENABL MAX STAR TIME Setting Range Y, N Off, 1600 s Factory Default N Off

Note: In addition to enabling the Star-Delta, you must assign Star and Delta to Auxiliary output relays (one each); see Table 5.37, and Figure 2.16 and Figure 2.17 for typical connection diagrams. The 825-P issues the command to switch from Star to Delta (Wye to Delta) as soon as the starting current has dropped to the rated value and the motor has reached its normal speed in Star (Wye). If starting has not been completed within the normal time for this application (Max Star Time setting, if used), the relay makes the change to delta, regardless of the speed attained. You can switch the maximum permissible time for star (wye) operation on or off. If it is off, the change to delta is made solely based on the motor current. If the motor has to be switched off when the total start time (Star and Delta) exceeds a set time, the Start Monitoring must also be used.

Start Inhibit
Table 5.17 Start Inhibit Settings
Setting Prompt STARTS/HR. MIN. OFF TIME RESTART BLK TIME Setting Range Off, 115 Off, 1150 min Off, 160 min Factory Default Off Off Off

When the protected motor is rated for a specific maximum number of starts per hour or minimum time between starts, set the Starts/Hr. and Min. Off Time settings accordingly. If the maximum number of starts per hour is achieved and the motor stops or is tripped, the relay asserts the Trip output contact to prevent an additional start until 60 minutes after the oldest start. If the motor stops or is tripped within the minimum time between starts period, the relay asserts the Trip output contact to prevent a new start until the minutes after the most recent start equals the Min. Off Time setting. In certain pump applications, fluid flowing backward through the pump could spin the pump motor for a short time in the reverse direction after the motor is stopped. An attempt to start the motor during this time can be damaging. To prevent motor starts during the backspin period, enter a time in minutes in the RESTART BLK TIME setting. If the relay trips or the motor is stopped, the relay generates a trip signal and maintain it for at least this amount of time. The relay does not issue a start during the Restart Block period.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-17

The relay maintains the trip signal until enough time passes for the motor to be safely restarted. During the lockout period, the relay displays a countdown time in minutes to the next allowed start. The Emergency Restart function overrides all three limits, clearing % TCU to zero and allowing the motor to be put back in service for an emergency.

Phase Reversal Protection


Table 5.18 Phase Reversal Setting
Setting Prompt PH REV. ENABLE Setting Range Y, N Factory Default N

The 825-P uses phase currents or phase voltages (if available) to determine that the phase rotation of signals applied to the relay matches the phase rotation setting. When you set Ph. Rev. Enable equal to Y, the relay trips 0.5 seconds after incorrect phase rotation signals are applied to the relay. For relays equipped with current inputs only, the trip occurs approximately 0.5 seconds after the motor start is initiated. When the relay is equipped with voltage inputs, the trip occurs approximately 0.5 seconds after AC voltages are applied to the relay.

Speed Switch (Stalling During Start)


Table 5.19 Speed Switch Settings
Setting Prompt SS TRIP DELAY SS WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 1240 s Off, 1240 s Factory Default Off Off

Note: In addition to setting the SS DELAY, you must connect the speed switch contact to an input assigned to Speed Switch (see Table 5.38 and Figure 2.4, Figure 2.18, and Figure 2.19 for connection diagrams). Speed Switch (Stalling During Start) protection provides mechanical sensing of a locked rotor condition through input monitoring of a speed switch that is mechanically coupled to the motor shaft. When the SS TRIP DELAY is set, the relay trips if the speed switch is not closed within the set time after the motor start begins. A separate delay, SS WARN DELAY, can also be set to provide a warning before the Speed Switch trip. Figure 5.4 shows typical currents during motor start (normal and stall during start) and the Speed Switch Trip Delay time setting.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-18

Protection and Logic Functions

Figure 5.4 Stalling During Starting

I Ie

1 = Normal start without hindrance by high overload or stalling 2 = Stalling during standing tv = SS TRIP DELAY time

Ie tv t

Thermistor (PTC) Monitoring


Table 5.20 PTC Settings
Setting Prompt PTC ENABLE PTC RESET MODE Setting Range Y, N Man, Auto Factory Default N Man

Note: In addition to enabling the PTC function, you must also connect at least one (but no more than six) thermistor(s) to the relay (see Figure 2.4 for a connection diagram). You can connect up to six PTC (positive temperature coefficient) thermistor sensors to the 825-P. The detectors are typically embedded in the stator winding of the motor and they monitor the actual temperature of the winding. This function is independent of the thermal model and accounts for conditions such as ambient temperature, obstructed cooling, etc. The sensors and their leads are also monitored for short-circuit faults. Figure 5.5 shows characteristics of the PTC. Setting PTC RESET MODE determines reset mode for the PTC element. If set to Auto mode, the PTC trip resets automatically when the element resets, if other trip conditions are not present. If set to Man, operator intervention (e.g., front-panel push button) is required to reset the PTC trip.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-19

Figure 5.5 Characteristic of PTC Sensors as per IEC 34-11-2


4000

1330

550
R ()

250

100

20 10 20C 0C TNF 20 K TNF 5 K TNF + 15 K TNF + 5 K TNF TNF Nominal pickup temperature R () Resistance to sensors

RTD-Based Protection

RTD Monitoring
When you connect the SEL-1523 RTD Module, the 825-P offers several protection and monitoring functions whose settings are described in Table 5.21. See Figure 2.3 for the location of the RTD module fiber-optic cable connector. Note: The 825-P can monitor up to 12 RTDs connected to the SEL-1523 RTD Module. Table 5.21 shows Location, Type, and Trip/Warn Level settings only for RTD1; settings for RTD2 through RTD12 are similar.
Table 5.21 RTD Settings
Setting Prompt RTD ENABLE RTD RESET MODE RTD1 LOCATION RTD1 TYPE RTD1 TRIP LEVEL RTD1 WARN LEVEL

Setting Range Y, N Man, Auto Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10 Off, 1250C Off, 1250C

Factory Default N Man Off PT100 Off Off


WIND TRIP VOTING BEAR TRIP VOTING TMP RTD BIASING?

Y, N Y, N Y, N

N N N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-20

Protection and Logic Functions

When the SEL-1523 RTD Module is not connected to the relay, disable the RTD function by setting RTD ENABLE equal to N. Setting RTD RESET MODE determines the reset mode for the RTD element. If set to Auto mode, the RTD trip resets automatically when the element resets, provided no other trip conditions are present. If set to Man, operator intervention (e.g., front-panel push button) is required to reset the RTD trip. The relay allows you to independently define the location of each monitored RTD using the RTD LOCATION settings. Define the RTD Location settings using the following suggestions: If an RTD is not connected to an input, or has failed in place and is not being replaced, set the RTD Location for that input to Off. For RTDs embedded in motor stator windings, set the RTD Location equal to WDG. For inputs connected to RTDs measuring bearing rise temperature, set the RTD Location equal to BRG. For the input connected to an RTD measuring ambient motor cooling air temperature, set the RTD Location equal to AMB. Only one ambient temperature RTD is allowed. For inputs connected to monitor temperatures of another apparatus, set the RTD Location equal to OTH. The relay allows you to independently define the type of each monitored RTD using the RTD Type settings. If an RTD Location setting is equal to Off, the relay does not request that an RTD Type setting be entered for that input. The four available RTD types are: 100-ohm platinum (PT100) 100-ohm nickel (NI100) 120-ohm nickel (NI120) 10-ohm copper (CU10)

The 825-P provides temperature warnings and trips using the RTD temperature measurements and the warning and trip temperature settings in Table 5.21. The relay issues a winding temperature warning if any of the healthy winding RTDs (RTD Location setting equals WDG) indicate a temperature greater than the corresponding RTD Warning Temperature setting. The relay issues a winding temperature trip if one or two of the healthy winding RTDs indicate a temperature greater than their RTD Trip Temperature settings. Two winding RTDs must indicate excessive temperature when the Winding Trip Voting setting equals Y. Only one excessive temperature indication is required if Winding Trip Voting is not enabled. Bearing Trip Voting works similarly.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-21

The warning and trip temperature settings for Bearing, Ambient, and Other RTD types function similarly except that trip voting is not available for Ambient and Other RTDs. To disable a temperature warning or trip function, set the appropriate temperature setting to Off. Only healthy RTDs can contribute temperatures to the warning and trip functions. The relay includes specific logic to indicate if RTD leads are shorted or open. When you have connected an ambient temperature sensing RTD and set trip temperatures for one or more winding RTDs, the relay gives you the option to enable RTD Trip Temperature biasing by setting TMP RTD BIASING equal to Y. The thermal model can also be biased by setting OL RTD BIASING equal to Y (see Table 5.5) When you enable either of the biasing, the relay does the following: Calculates RTD % Thermal Capacity and adds the value to the Thermal Meter values. Automatically reduces the winding RTD Trip Temperatures if ambient temperature rises above 40C and TMP RTD BIASING is set equal to Y. Automatically reduces the Thermal Model element trip threshold if ambient temperature rises above 40C and OL RTD BIASING is set equal to Y. Provides an RTD Bias Alarm if the winding temperature exceeds 60C rise over ambient and the RTD % Thermal Capacity exceeds the thermal element % Thermal Capacity by more than 10%. EXAMPLE

Relay Calculation of RTD% Thermal Capacity:


Winding RTD Ambient RTD% Temperature Temperature = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 100% Winding RTD Trip Ambient Thermal Capacity Temperature Temperature

As ambient temperature rises, the motors ability to shed heat to the surroundings is reduced and internal temperatures rise. To preserve insulation life, NEMA standards suggest a 1C reduction in RTD Trip Temperature for each 1C rise in ambient temperature over 40C. When you enable RTD biasing, the 825-P automatically reduces the RTD Trip Temperatures for all winding RTDs when ambient temperature is above 40C. The relay reduces the trip temperatures by 1C for each degree rise in ambient temperature over 40C. Finally, when you enable Thermal Model biasing, the relay provides an RTD Bias Alarm when the RTD % Thermal Capacity exceeds the thermal element

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-22

Protection and Logic Functions

% Thermal Capacity by more than 10 percentage points while the winding temperature rise is higher than 60C over ambient. This alarm can be a useful indicator that the motor has lost coolant flow or that the winding RTD Trip Temperature is conservatively low. For all the RTD Thermal Capacity and bias calculations described above, the relay uses the winding RTD whose measured temperature is closest to its trip value.

Voltage-Based Protection

The following information applies to relay models with voltage inputs.

Undervoltage
Table 5.22 Undervoltage Settings
Setting Prompt UV TRIP LEVEL UV TRIP DELAY UV WARN LEVEL UV WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 0.601.00 xVnm 0.0120.0 s Off, 0.601.00 xVnm 0.0120.0 s Factory Default Off 0.0 Off 5.0

Overvoltage
Table 5.23 Overvoltage Settings
Setting Prompt OV TRIP LEVEL OV TRIP DELAY OV WARN LEVEL OV WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 1.001.20 xVnm 0.0120.0 s Off, 1.001.20 xVnm 0.0120.0 s Setting Name := Factory Default Off 0.0 Off 5.0

When you connect the 825-P voltage inputs to phase-to-phase connected VTs, as in Figure 2.11, the relay provides two levels of phase-to-phase overvoltage and undervoltage elements. When you connect the 825-P voltage inputs to phase-to-neutral connected VTs, as in Figure 2.11, the relay provides two levels of phase-to-neutral overvoltage and undervoltage elements. Each of the elements has an associated time delay. You can use these elements for tripping and warning. To disable an element, set the level setting to Off.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-23

VAR Function
Table 5.24 VAR Settings
Setting Prompt NEG VAR TRIP LEV POS VAR TRIP LEV VAR TRIP DLY NEG VAR WARN LEV POS VAR WARN LEV VAR WARN DLY Setting Range Off, 125000 KVAR Off, 125000 KVAR 0240 s Off, 125000 KVAR Off, 125000 KVAR 0240 s Factory Default Off Off 1 Off Off 1

Note: VAR Trip and Warning Level settings are in Primary KVAR. If the positive or negative reactive power exceeds the appropriate level for longer than the time delay setting, the relay can issue a warning or trip signal. The reactive power elements are disabled when the motor is stopped or starting. Elements can be used to detect synchronous motor out-of-step or loss-of-field conditions. Refer to Figure 6.1 for the relay power measurement convention. For relay application on an induction motor, it is recommended that the installer disable the elements by setting both the Negative VAR Warn Level and Negative VAR Trip Level settings to Off.

Underpower
Table 5.25 Underpower Settings
Setting Prompt UP TRIP LEVEL UP TRIP DELAY UP WARN LEVEL UP WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 125000 kW 0240 s Off, 125000 kW 0240 s Factory Default Off 1 Off 1

Note: Underpower Trip and Warning Level settings are in Primary kW. If the real three-phase power falls below the warning or trip level for longer than the time delay setting, the relay can issue a warning or trip signal. The underpower elements are disabled when the motor is stopped or starting. Underpower elements operate in addition to the Load Loss function and you can use them to detect motor load loss and other underpower conditions. Disable the elements by setting the Underpower Warning Level and Underpower Trip Level settings to Off.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-24

Protection and Logic Functions

Power Factor
Table 5.26 Power Factor Settings
Setting Prompt PF LAG TRIP LEV PF LD TRIP LEV PF TRIP DELAY PF LAG WARN LEV PF LD WARN LEV PF WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 0.050.99 Off, 0.050.99 0240 s Off, 0.050.99 Off, 0.050.99 0240 s Factory Default Off Off 1 Off Off 1

If the measured power factor falls below the leading or lagging level for longer than the time delay setting, the relay can issue a warning or trip signal. The power factor elements are disabled when the motor is stopped or starting. Power factor elements can be used to detect synchronous motor out-of-step or loss-of-field conditions. Refer to Figure 6.1 for the relay power measurement convention. For application on an induction motor, it is recommended that the installer disable the elements by setting all four Power Factor Level settings to Off.

Frequency
Table 5.27 Frequency Settings
Setting Prompt FREQ1 TRIP LEVEL FREQ1 TRIP DELAY FREQ1 WARN LEVEL FREQ1 WARN DELAY FREQ2 TRIP LEVEL FREQ2 TRIP DELAY FREQ2 WARN LEVEL FREQ2 WARN DELAY Setting Range Off, 55.065.0 Hz 0.0240.0 s Off, 55.065.0 Hz 0.0240.0 s Off, 55.065.0 Hz 0.0240.0 s Off, 55.065.0 Hz 0.0240.0 s Factory Default Off 0.0 Off 0.0 Off 0.0 Off 0.0

Note: The setting range for Trip and Warn Levels shown in Table 5.27 are for Rated Freq. := 60 Hz. The setting ranges are Off, 45.055.0 Hz when Rated Freq. := 50 Hz. The 825-P provides two warning and two trip overfrequency or underfrequency elements with independent level and time-delay settings. When an element level setting is less than the Nominal Frequency setting, the element operates as an underfrequency element. When the level setting is greater than the Nominal Frequency setting, the element operates as an overfrequency element.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-25

The relay measures system frequency for these elements using the positive sequence voltage if the voltage input option is present. Otherwise, the relay uses positive sequence current.

Load Control Function


Table 5.28 Load Control Settings
Setting Prompt LOAD CONTROL SEL LD CTL CUR UPPER LD CTL CUR LOWER LD CTL PWR UPPER LD CTL PWR LOWER LD CTL TCU UPPER LD CTL TCU LOWER Setting Range Off, Current, Power, TCU Off, 0.202.00 x Ie Off, 0.202.00 x Ie Off, 125000 kW Off, 125000 kW Off, 199%TCU Off, 199%TCU Factory Default Off Off Off Off Off Off Off

Note: Prompt of settings LD CTL UPPER and LD CTL LOWER are dependent on the LD CONTROL SEL setting. All possible prompts are shown in Table 5.28. The relay only shows the appropriate prompts based on the LD CONTROL SEL setting. Note: In addition to setting the Load Control levels, you must assign LD CTL UPPER and LD CTL LOWER to auxiliary output relays (one each); see Table 5.37, and Figure 2.4 for connection diagrams. The 825-P provides an ability to control external devices based on parameter Load Control Selection. You can select Current, Power, or Thermal Capacity Utilized to operate auxiliary outputs. When the selected parameter exceeds the level set by Load Control Upper for 1 second, the assigned auxiliary relay operates. The auxiliary relay resets when the parameter drops below the upper level setting for 1 second. When the selected parameter drops below the level set by Load Control Lower for 1 second, the assigned auxiliary relay operates. The auxiliary relay resets when the parameter is above the lower-level setting for 1 second. You can use this feature to control the motor load within set limits.

I/O Configuration

Analog Output
Table 5.29 I/O Settings
Setting Prompt ANALOG OUT SEL Setting Range LOAD_I, AVG_I, MAX_I, %THERM, WDG_RTD, BRG_RTD, PWR_kW, PF Factory Default LOAD_I

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-26

Protection and Logic Functions

The expansion I/O option provides a 420 mA DC analog current output with a variety of output parameters. Use the Analog Output Select setting to select a parameter from the list of available options. Table 5.30 shows description and scaling of the output for different parameter selections.
Table 5.30 Scaling of Analog Output
ANALOG OUT SEL (AOPARM) LOAD_I AVG_I MAX_I %THERM WDG_RTD BRG_RTD PWR_kW PF Description Average Load Current Average Load Current Maximum of the Phase currents Percentage Thermal Capacity Hottest Winding RTD Temperature Hottest Bearing RTD Temperature Motor Power Motor Power Factor Output Scaling (4 mA)(20 mA) (Unit) 0.01.0 Per Unit of FLA 0.22.0 Per Unit of FLA 0.22.0 Per Unit of FLA 0100%TCU 0250C 0250C 0.01.0 per unit FLVA 0.8 Lag0.8 Lead

Select LOAD_I to scale the analog output based on motor current if the output is not of interest during overload conditions. Select either AVG_I or MAX_I to scale the analog output based on motor current and if the output is required during overload conditions. Both LOAD_I and AVG_I use an average magnitude of three phase currents to drive the analog output; MAX_I uses a maximum magnitude of the three phase currents. If the relay includes the voltage input option and you select PWR_kW parameter, the analog output is scaled using real power. The following defines per unit FLVA:
1 per unit FLVA := 1.732 (VNOM) (FLAn) Where: VNOM = FLAn =

Nominal voltage setting Full Load Current setting (n = 1, for Speed-1 or 2 for Speed-2)

If the relay includes the voltage input option and you select PF parameter, the analog output is scaled using power factor. For power factors 0.8 lag, unity, and 0.8 lead, the analog outputs are 4 mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA, respectively.

Trip Inhibit (Block)


Table 5.31 Trip Inhibit Settings
Setting Prompt CURRENT IMBALANC JAM GROUND FAULT Setting Range Y, N Y, N Y, N Factory Default N N N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-27

Table 5.31 Trip Inhibit Settings


Setting Prompt SHORT CIRCUIT UNDERCURRENT START INHIBIT PTC RTD Setting Range Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Factory Default N N N N N

Note: In addition to selecting the functions to be inhibited, you must assign Block Protection to an input. See Table 5.38 for a description and Figure 2.4 for a typical connection diagram. With a Block Protection control input, one or more protective functions listed in Table 5.31 can be inhibited when the contact closes. During certain operational phases, when the level (e.g., motor current) differs from the normal values, such as in the following situations. During starting: earth fault and short-circuit protection At no-load: protection against asymmetry and underload During brief overload phases: high overload/jam During commissioning and fault location (localizing the source of the trouble) the selected functions are completely disabled as long as the control input is asserted. No warning No trip; no reset Tripping delays begin to run only after the function is re-enabled.

Output Relay Behavior


Table 5.32 Relay Behavior Settings
Setting Prompt TRIP FAIL-SAFE AUX1 FAIL-SAFE AUX2 FAIL-SAFE AUX3 FAIL-SAFE AUX4 FAIL-SAFE AUX5 FAIL-SAFE AUX6 FAIL-SAFE Setting Range Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Factory Default Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

The 825-P allows you to enable fail-safe output contact operation for relay contacts on an individual basis. When contact fail-safe is enabled, the relay output is held in its energized position when relay control power is applied and falls to its de-energized position when control power is removed. Contact positions with de-energized output relays are indicated on the relay chassis (and also in Figure 2.3).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-28

Protection and Logic Functions

When Trip Output Fail-safe is enabled and the Trip contact is appropriately connected to the motor breaker or contactor, the motor is automatically tripped when relay control power fails. This setting/connection philosophy is appropriate if the protected motor is more valuable than the process that the motor supports. In critical applications where the protected motor is not more valuable than the process, you may want the motor to run even if the relay is out of service. In this case, disable Trip Output Fail-safe by selecting N. In addition, you can select an auxiliary outputs to be Fail-Safe or Non-Fail-safe, depending on your application. ATTENTION Pay close attention to the Trip Fail-Safe setting to ensure proper labeling of the plug connector for terminals 95, 96, and 98..

!
Timer Function
Setting Prompt ON DELAY T1 OFF DELAY T1 ON DELAY T2 OFF DELAY T2

Table 5.33 Timer Settings


Setting Range 0240 s 0240 s 0240 s 0240 s Factory Default 0 0 0 0

Note: In addition to setting the On and Off Delays, you must assign TIMER1 and/or TIMER2 to a control input (see Table 5.38). You must also assign TIMER1T and/or TIMER2T to auxiliary output relays. See Table 5.37 for detail. When you assign an input contact and an output auxiliary relay to appropriate parameters of Timer Function, the output responds to the change in input contact with the characteristics shown in Figure 5.6. This feature has the following application examples: Time-graded switching on and off Delaying the transfer of alarm and trip messages

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-29

Figure 5.6 Operating Characteristics of Timer Functions


Control Input TIMER Ton Toff Ton = On-delay Toff = Off-delay n = 1 or 2 Control Input On-Delay Ton (Toff = 0) Off-Delay (Ton = 0) On-Off-Delay Ton On-Off-Delay Ton Toff Toff Toff Output Relay Word TIMERnT

Front-Panel Settings
Table 5.34 Front-Panel Settings
Setting Prompt LCD TIMEOUT LCD CONTRAST Setting Range Off, 130 min 18 Factory Default 15 5

The LCD TIMEOUT indicates the duration of inactivity before the LCD backlight will extinguish, the Access Level will be automatically reset and the present function will be automatically terminated. Use the Front-Panel LCD Timeout setting as a security measure. If the display is within an Access Level 2 function, such as the relay setting entry, the function is automatically terminated (without saving changes) after inactivity for this length of time. The front-panel display returns to the default display (see Table 5.35 for the default rotating display settings). If you prefer to disable the front-panel timeout function during relay testing, set the LCD Timeout equal to 0 minutes. Use the Front-Panel LCD Contrast setting to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystal display.

Display Enable
Table 5.35 Display Enable Settings
Setting Prompt TIME & DATE GROUND CURRENT CURRENT IMBALANC Setting Range Y, N Y, N Y, N Factory Default N N N

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-30

Protection and Logic Functions

Table 5.35 Display Enable Settings


Setting Prompt FREQUENCY THERM CAP USED VOLTAGE IMBALANC POWER RTD TEMPERATURE Setting Range Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Y, N Factory Default N N N N N

The relay default front-panel rotating display shows unit identifiers (see Table 5.1) and magnitudes of measured phase currents and, if included, phase-to-phase voltages. The Display Enable settings give you the option to add quantities listed in Table 5.35 to the default display. When you select Y for a quantity, it is added to the rotating display. Voltage Imbalance and Power displays require the voltage input option. When the relay is equipped with external RTD inputs and the Display Enable RTD Temperature setting equals Y, the relay displays the temperatures of the hottest winding, bearing, and other RTDs, plus the ambient temperature.

I/O Assignments
Table 5.36 Trip Relay Assignments
Setting Prompt TRIP A 0 X X X X X X X X TRIP B X X X X X X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Overload Undercurrent Jam Current Imbalance Short Circuit RTD (Winding/Bearing) PTC Ground Fault (Residual) VAR Underpower Undervoltage Overvoltage Phase Reversal Power Factor Speed Switch Ground Fault (Core Balance)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-31

Table 5.36 Trip Relay Assignments


Setting Prompt TRIP C 0 X X X X X X X X TRIP D X X X X X X X X

Description Start Time Frequency 1 Frequency 2 RTD (Other) RTD (Ambient) PTC Error RTD Error MCM Error Comm Idle Comm Loss Remote Trip Comm Fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

1 = assigned, 0 = unassigned

Note: The 825-P uses settings TRIPA through TRIPD and setting TRIP FAIL-SAFE (see Table 5.32) to determine the operation of the Trip Output. The 825-P allows mapping of protection trip elements to the trip output. Table 5.36 shows the method of mapping elements using Relay Word bits associated with elements. Select 1 for each element you want to map using the TRIPA through TRIPD settings. The relay will OR them together to drive the Trip output. A logical "OR" describes when any one assigned element asserts, the Trip relay will operate.
Table 5.37 Aux Assignments
Setting Prompt Aux# A 0 X X X X X X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Overload Undercurrent Jam Current Imbalance Short Circuit RTD (Winding/Bearing) PTC Ground Fault (Residual)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-32

Protection and Logic Functions

Table 5.37 Aux Assignments (Continued)


Setting Prompt Aux# B 0 X X X X X X X X Aux# C X X X X X X X X Aux# D X X X X X X X X Aux# E X X X X X X X X Aux# F X X X X X X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description VAR Underpower Undervoltage Overvoltage Phase Reversal Power Factor Speed Switch Ground Fault (Core Balance) Start Time Frequency 1 Frequency 2 RTD (Other) RTD (Ambient) PTC Error RTD Error MCM Error Comm Idle Comm Loss Remote Trip Comm Fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Overload Warning Undercurrent Warning Jam Warning Current Imbalance Warning RTD (Winding/Bearing) Warning Power Factor Warning Ground Fault (Core Balance) Warning Ground Fault (Residual) Warning VAR Warning Underpower Warning Undervoltage Warning Overvoltage Warning Speed Switch Warning Frequency 1 Warning Frequency 2 Warning RTD (Other) Warning

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-33

Table 5.37 Aux Assignments (Continued)


Setting Prompt Aux# G 0 X X X X X X X X Aux# H X X X X X X X X

Description RTD (Ambient) Warning Setting Warning General Warning Load Control Upper Load Control Lower Timer 1 Timer 2 Short Circuit Warning Stopped State Running State Starting State Star (Wye) Starting State Delta Starting State Start Command Network Control Reserved

1 = assigned, 0 = unassigned

Note: The 825-P uses settings AUX# A through AUX# H and setting AUX# FAIL-SAFE in the output logic (see Table 5.32 for more details) to determine the operation of the corresponding auxiliary. Note: The AUX# A through AUX# D bytes are used to map trip functions to the output. The AUX# E through AUX# H bytes are used to map warning and status functions to the output. The 825-P allows mapping of protection (trip and warning) and general-purpose control elements to the auxiliary outputs. Table 5.37 shows the method of mapping the elements using Relay Word bits associated with the elements, except the NETWORK, which is described below. Select 1 for each element you want to map using the AUX# A through AUX# H settings. The relay will OR them together to drive the Aux1 output. If NETWORK is mapped to an AUX output, the DeviceNet network can control the output. The DeviceNet can individually control those Auxiliary outputs with NETWORK mapped to them.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-34

Protection and Logic Functions

Table 5.38 Input Assignments


Setting Prompt IN# 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 Description Emergency Start Disable Settings Trip Reset Timer 1 Timer 2 Speed Switch Block Protection Speed 2 Breaker/Contactor Auxiliary Remote Trip

Note: The 825-P allows one control function to an input and one input to a control function (see Table 3.3). Note: In addition to setting an Input Assignment, you must connect a control contact to the input (see Figure 2.4 for a typical connection diagram). The 825-P provides the ability to assign a control function to each control input. Table 5.38 shows the available control functions and the method of assigning them. When a control input is asserted, the 825-P performs the control action assigned to the input. The control action of each of the available functions is described below: Emergency Start Overrides all active start inhibits, clears the % TCU to zero and immediately initiates a motor start. Disable Settings Disables all settings changes from the front panel, serial port, and DeviceNet network; when this input is asserted, you can view the settings but you cannot change them. Disables the Test/Reset push button function. Trip Reset Resets the Trip output and front-panel Trip LED, provided there is no trip condition present (including start inhibit lockouts). TIMER1 (Timer 1 Input) Provides input to Timer1 Function (see Figure 5.6 for more details). TIMER2 (Timer 2 Input) Provides input to Timer2 Function (see Figure 5.6 for more details). Speed Switch Provides input to Speed Switch Protection Function. See Speed Switch (Stalling During Start) on page 5-17 for more details. Block Protection Inhibits selected protection functions when the input is asserted. See Table 5.31 for more details.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-35

Speed 2 When the SPEED2 control input is asserted and Two Speed Enable setting is Y (see Table 5.3) the 825-P selects second values for the settings. See Table 5.3 and Table 5.5 for a full description of various settings. Use the SPEED2 input for two-speed motor applications. You can also use this input to change the settings in applications where ambient temperature varies appreciably (e.g., exposed water pumps with different capacities during daytime and at night). Breaker/Contactor Auxiliary Use input if motors have an operational idling current of less than 20% FLA. Use the auxiliary contact of motor contactor or another contact, which indicates that the motor is switched on. The relay uses this input information to correctly determine the Motor State (Running verses Stopped), particularly important during periods of low idling current. Remote Trip Use this input to trip the motor by remote protection or a control device (e.g., vibration switch and pressure switch).

Logic Explanation

Stop/Trip Logic
The 825-P tripping logic is designed to trip or stop motors energized through circuit breakers or contactors. Trip relay contacts 95/96 are designed for the purpose of being applied in motor control circuits. The relay logic lets you define the conditions that cause a trip and the performance of the trip relay output contacts.

Initiate Trip
The 825-P Trip Logic offers two ways to stop the protected motor: Trip Output Assignments. Serial port or network STOP command. Either of these two conditions triggers an event report. The relay controls the Trip output contacts, depending on the relay behavior setting Trip Fail-Safe. Assign the protection element Relay Word bits that you want to cause the relay to trip to the Trip output (see Table 5.36).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-36

Protection and Logic Functions

Unlatch Trip
Following a fault, the trip condition is maintained until all of the following conditions are true: 0.5 second minimum trip duration time passes. A Trip reset command is received as follows: An Auto Reset bit from Overload, RTD, or PTC protection elements asserts. A rising edge of the Target Reset control bit (from control input, front panel, serial port, network, or Emergency Start) is detected. All the motor lockout functions, described below, de-assert. The relay automatically locks out the trip relay by asserting the trip signal under any of the following start-inhibiting conditions: Restart (Anti-backspin) Block The restart block timer has not expired since the motor trip occurred. The trip condition is maintained until the timer expires. Minimum Time Between Starts Lockout A new start is not permitted until after the minimum time between starts has passed. The trip condition is maintained until a start is permitted. Starts-Per-Hour Limit Lockout If the starts-per-hour limit has been met, a new start is not permitted until 60 minutes after the oldest start. The trip condition is maintained until a start is permitted. TCU Start Inhibit The motor thermal element % Thermal Capacity value is too high to permit a normal motor start without tripping. The trip condition is maintained until the % Thermal Capacity decreases to a level where a start can safely take place. If any of the above protection functions is not enabled by the relay settings, that function does not affect trip unlatch. Also note that the relay automatically asserts the trip signal if the motor stops and a lockout condition is true. The trip signal is maintained until all the enabled motor lockout conditions are satisfied. Trips initiated by the serial port command or by network operation are maintained for at least 0.5 second.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Protection and Logic Functions

5-37

Start and Emergency Restart Logic


If the Trip output contact is not asserted, the relay asserts the START Relay Word bit in response to any of the following conditions: The Emergency Restart Relay Word bit asserts. You execute the STR serial port command or a DeviceNet Start Motor control command. The START Relay Word bit remains asserted for 0.5 seconds, unless the relay trips. If the relay trips before the 0.5 second timer expires, the relay resets the timer, clearing the START Relay Word bit. In an emergency, it could be necessary to quickly start the motor even though a protection lockout condition exists and is holding the Trip output contact asserted. The lockout might be a result of the thermal element or another protection function. You can override all of the lockout conditions using the Emergency Restart function. The relay asserts the Emergency Restart bit in response to any of the following conditions: The control input assigned to Emergency Restart asserts. The relay receives a network Emergency Restart control command. When the Emergency Restart bit asserts, the relay does the following: Resets the motor thermal element capacity used to 0%. Manipulates the Starts-Per-Hour, Minimum Time Between Starts, and Anti-backspin functions to permit an immediate start. De-asserts the Trip output contact if a fault detecting element is not picked up. Initiates a motor start.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

5-38

Protection and Logic Functions

Overload Curves
100000

Figure 5.7 Thermal Overload Curves

10000

Locked Rotor Time in seconds 1000

Trip times are for cold (ambient) motor, without preload. Relay Settings Service Factor, SF = 1.01 Acceleration Factor, TD = 1.00 Run State Time Constant, RTC = Auto Motor LRC = 6.0 Ie

Trip Time in Seconds

600 400

200 100 100

50

25

10

10

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Multiples of Full Load Amps

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Metering and Monitoring

Overview

The 825-P Relay includes metering functions to display the present values of current, voltage (if included), and RTD measurements (from the external SEL-1523 RTD Module). The relay provides the following methods to read the present meter values: Rotating front-panel display Front-panel menu Front-panel EIA-232 serial port Network port (if installed) Analog output

For monitoring and preventive maintenance purposes, the 825-P provides a motor operating statistics report, available using either the front panel, the serial port, or the optional network port.

Metering

The 825-P meter data falls into the following categories: Instantaneous metering Thermal metering Thermal model metering RTD metering Note that the phases and neutral are identified by 1, 2, 3, N for currents and A, B, C, N for voltages. Table 6.1 details each of the meter data types in the 825-P. Chapter 3: Front-Panel Operation and Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications describes how to access the various types of meter data using the relay front-panel and communications ports.

6-2

Metering and Monitoring

Instantaneous Metering
Table 6.1 Measured Values Relay Option All Models Meter Values Line Currents L1, L2, and L3 IN (Core-Balance Ground Fault Current) magnitudes (A) and phase angles () IG (Residual Ground Fault Current) magnitude (A) and phase angle () IM (Average Current Magnitude) Average Motor Load (x Ie) Current Imbalance % System Frequency (Hz) With Voltage Option VAB, VBC, VCA or VAN, VBN, VCN, VG magnitudes (V) and phase angles () Average Voltage (L-L or L-N) Voltage Imbalance % Real Power (kW) Reactive Power (kVAR) Apparent Power (kVA) Power Factor

All angles are displayed between 180+180. Delta-connected PT angles are referenced to VAB or L1 and wye-connected PT angles are referenced to VAN or L1. If the voltage channels are not supported or if VAB < 13V (for Delta) or VAN < 13V (for Wye), PT angles are referenced to L1 current.

Thermal Metering
The thermal metering function reports the present values of the RTD input temperatures and several quantities related to the motor overload protection function (Table 6.2).
Table 6.2 Thermal Meter Values Relay Option All Models Thermal Values Average Motor Load (x Ie) Thermal Capacity Used % Time to Trip (s) Time to Reset (min) Starts Available With External SEL-1523 RTD Module All RTD Temperatures RTD % Thermal Capacity

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Metering and Monitoring

6-3

Note: If the Overload Protection is disabled, the relay always reports % Thermal Capacity = 999 and Calculated Time to Thermal Trip (s) = 9999. The thermal meter function also reports the state of connected RTDs if any have failed. Table 6.3 shows failure messages.
Table 6.3 RTD Input Status Messages Message Open Short Comm Fail Stat Fail Status RTD leads open RTD leads shorted Fiber-optic communications to SEL-1523 RTD Module have failed SEL-1523 RTD Module self-test status failure

Power Measurement Conventions

The 825-P uses the IEEE convention for power measurement assuming motor action. The implications of this convention are shown in Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1 Complex Power Measurement Conventions
Source Bus Direction of Positive Real Power Motor

825-P Relay

I lags V W= VAR = + PF = LEAD

Q+ (VAR)

I lags V W = + Power Into Motor VAR = + PF = LAG

P+ (W)

I leads V W= VAR = PF = LAG

I leads V W=+ VAR = PF = LEAD

In the 825-P, reported positive real power is always into the motor.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

6-4

Metering and Monitoring

Motor Operating Statistics

The 825-P retains useful machine operating statistics information regarding the protected motor. Note: While the relay power is off, the elapsed timers do not advance. If relay power is off for a significant amount of time, the elapsed calendar time does not match the elapsed time recorded by the relay. The serial port MOTOR command and the front-panel MOTOR MONITOR menu make the stored data available. The data is also available at the optional network port. The monitoring includes motor operating history, including time running, time stopped, percent time running (of total time), number of starts, and number of emergency starts.
Figure 6.2 MOTOR Command Report

=>>MOT 825-P Modular Prot. System OPERATING HISTORY (elapsed time in ddd:hh:mm) RUNNING TIME: STOPPED TIME: TIME RUNNING: NUMBER OF STARTS: NUMBER OF EMERGENCY STARTS: >0:00:13 0:00:00 100.0% 1 0 SINCE: 03/05/2003 17:17:21 Date: 03/05/2003 Time: 17:30:31.832

=>>

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Analyzing Events

Overview

The 825-P Relay provides several facilities to analyze the cause of relay trip operations. Use these tools to help diagnose the cause of the relay trip operation and more quickly restore the protected motor to service. Each tool, listed below, provides increasing detail regarding the causes of a relay operation. Serial port event summary reports Serial port Serialized Events Recording (SER) function

Event Summary Reports

Each time the 825-P trips, and in response to other selected conditions, it captures motor current and voltage (if included). This collection of data is called an event summary report. This section explains what causes the relay to save an event summary report, how to retrieve new event summary data, and what the event summary data means. The relay stores the five most recent event summary reports in nonvolatile memory. These reports are numbered 1 through 5. When the relay stores a new report, it discards the oldest report if five reports are already in memory. Use the event summary data to help discern the cause of relay trip operations. View the present collection of event summary reports using the front-panel Events menu selection or the serial port Summary command. Each event summary report includes the following information: Type of event, from the list of event type strings in Figure 3.3 on page 3-4. Event number, date, and time. Magnitudes of the line, core balance, and residual currents. Magnitudes of the line-to-neutral (wye) or phase-to-phase voltages (delta), if included.

7-2

Analyzing Events

Report Triggering
The 825-P triggers an event summary report when the relay trips by protection elements.

Retrieving Reports
Use the serial port Summary command (see Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications) to retrieve event summary reports.

Current and Voltage Columns


Table 7.1 summarizes the event summary report current and voltage columns.
Table 7.1 Event Report Current and Voltage Columns Column Heading L1 L2 L3 RES CB VAN or VAB VBN or VBC VCN or VCA VG Definition Current measured by channel L1 (primary A) Current measured by channel L2 (primary A) Current measured by channel L3 (primary A) Residual current (L1 + L2 + L3, primary A) Current measured by channel IN (primary A) Voltage measured by channel VAN or VAB (primary V) Voltage measured by channel VBN or VBC (primary V) Voltage measured by channel VCN or calculated from VAB and VBC (primary V) Zero-sequence voltage (VAN + VBN + VCN, primary V)

Resetting the Buffer


The Summary R command clears the event summary reports.

Serialized Events Recording (SER) Report

SER Triggering
The relay stores an entry in the SER report for a change of state of any one of the elements listed in Table C.2 and Table C.3.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Analyzing Events

7-3

The relay adds the following message to the SER to indicate power up or settings change conditions: Relay newly powered up or settings changed Each entry in the SER includes SER row number, date, time, element name, and element state.

Retrieving SER Reports


The relay saves the latest 512 rows of the SER report in nonvolatile memory. Row 1 is the most recently triggered row and Row 512 is the oldest. Use the serial port SER command to view the SER report by date or SER row number as outlined in the examples shown in Table 7.2.
Table 7.2 Retrieving SER Reports (Sheet 1 of 2) Example SER Serial Port Commands SER Format

If you enter the SER command with no numbers following it, the relay displays all available rows, up to Row 512. The rows display with the oldest row at the beginning (top) of the report and the newest row (Row 1) at the end (bottom) of the report. Chronological progression through the report is down the page and in descending row number. If you enter the SER command with a single number following it, the relay displays that number of rows, if they exist. The rows display with the oldest row at the beginning (top) of the report and the newest row (Row 1) at the end (bottom) of the report. Chronological progression through the report is down the page and in descending row number. If you enter the SER command with two numbers following it, the relay displays all the rows between (and including) Rows 10 and 33, if they exist. The rows display with the oldest row (Row 33) at the beginning (top) of the report and the latest row (Row 10) at the end (bottom) of the report. Chronological progression through the report is down the page and in descending row number. If you enter the SER command with two numbers following it, the relay displays all the rows between (and including) Rows 47 and 22, if they exist. The rows display with the row (Row 22) at the beginning (top) of the report and the oldest row (Row 47) at the end (bottom) of the report. Reverse chronological progression through the report is down the page and in ascending row number.

SER 17

SER 10 33

SER 47 22

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

7-4

Analyzing Events

Table 7.2 Retrieving SER Reports (Sheet 2 of 2) Example SER Serial Port Commands SER 3/30/03 Format

If you enter the SER command with one date following it, the relay displays all the rows on that date, if they exist. The rows display with the oldest row at the beginning (top) of the report and the latest row at the end (bottom) of the report, for the given date. Chronological progression through the report is down the page and in descending row number.

SER 2/17/03 3/23/03 If you enter the SER command with two dates following it, the relay displays all the rows between (and including) dates 2/17/03 and 3/23/03, if they exist. The rows display with the oldest row (date 2/17/03) at the beginning (top) of the report and the latest row (date 3/23/03) at the end (bottom) of the report. Chronological progression through the report is down the page and in descending row number. SER 3/16/03 1/5/03 If you enter the SER command with two dates following it, the relay displays all the rows between (and including) dates 1/5/03 and 3/16/03, if they exist. The rows display with the latest row (date 3/16/03) at the beginning (top) of the report and the oldest row (date 1/5/03) at the end (bottom) of the report. Reverse chronological progression through the report is down the page and in ascending row number.

The date entries in the previous example SER commands depend on the Date Format setting DATE_F. If setting DATE_F is equal to MDY, enter the dates as in the above examples (Month/Day/Year). If setting DATE_F is equal to YMD, enter the dates Year/Month/Day. If setting DATE_F is equal to DMY, enter the dates Date/Month/Year. If the requested SER event report rows do not exist, the relay displays the following message:
No SER Data

Resetting the SER Report Buffer


Reset the SER data with the serial port SER R command.

Example Reports

Event Summary Report


The example event summary report in Figure 7.1 corresponds to the example Serialized Events Recording (SER) report in Figure 7.2.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Analyzing Events

7-5

Figure 7.1 Example Event Summary Report


=>SUM <Enter> 825-P Modular 14:50:06:032 Prot. System Event #: 1 Event Date: 06/07/2003 L1 CURRENT MAG (A): 259.7 VAN VOLTAGE MAG L-N (V): 458 L2 191.6 VBN 460 Event: No Trip Event Time: 14:39:47:907 L3 190.6 VCN 457 VG 456 RES 0.1 CB 68.2 Date: 06/07/2003 Time:

Serialized Events Recording (SER) Report


The example SER report in Figure 7.2 includes records of events that occurred before the beginning of the event summary report in Figure 7.1. The SER event report rows are explained in Table 7.3, numbered in correspondence to the Item # column.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

7-6

Analyzing Events

Figure 7.2 Example SER Report


=>SER <Enter> 825-P Modular Time: 14:50:04.744 Prot. System FID=825-Modular xxxx-Vxxxx-Zxxxxxx-Dxxxxxxxxx # 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DATE 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 06/07/2003 TIME 14:34:32.786 14:34:32.786 14:34:42.795 14:34:42.795 14:39:45.398 14:39:47.907 14:39:47.907 14:39:48.007 14:39:48.007 14:39:48.028 14:39:48.028 ELEMENT STOPPED STARTING RUNNING STARTING AMBALRM AMBTRIP TRIP AMBTRIP AMBALRM STOPPED RUNNING STATE Deasserted Asserted Asserted Deasserted Asserted Asserted Asserted Deasserted Deasserted Asserted Deasserted Date: 07/07/2003

Table 7.3 Example SER Report Explanations Item # 11, 10, 9, 8, 7 Explanation After a 10-second accelerating time, the motor relay indicates the motor is running (9). Later, the ambient temperature alarm element asserts. The ambient temperature trip element times out, causing the relay to trip. Trip is asserted. Declining temperature allows the elements to drop out. As the current continues to drop, the relay declares the motor stopped.

6, 5 4, 3 2, 1

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Chapter

Testing and Troubleshooting

Overview

Relay testing is typically divided into two categories: Tests performed when the relay is installed or commissioned. Tests performed periodically once the relay is in service. This chapter provides information on both types of testing for the 825-P Relay. Because the 825-P is equipped with extensive self-tests, traditional periodic test procedures can be eliminated or reduced. If a problem occurs during either commissioning or periodic tests, this chapter provides a guide to isolating and correcting the problem (see Troubleshooting on page 8-14).

Testing

Commissioning Tests
Introduction
Each 825-P is fully calibrated and functionally tested prior to shipment. This helps to ensure that you receive a relay that operates correctly and accurately. Commissioning tests must verify that the relay is properly connected to the motor and all auxiliary equipment. Verify control signal inputs and outputs. Use an AC connection check to verify that the relay current and voltage inputs are of the proper magnitude and phase rotation. Brief functional tests ensure that the relay settings are correct. It is not necessary to test every element, timer, and function in these tests. The following procedure is a guideline to help you enter settings into the 825-P and to verify that it is properly connected. Modify the procedure as necessary to conform to your standard practices. Use this procedure at initial relay installation; you do not need to repeat it unless major changes are made to the relay electrical connections.

8-2

Testing and Troubleshooting

Required Equipment
The 825-P, installed and connected according to your protection design. PC with serial port, terminal emulation software, and serial communication cable. 825-P Relay Settings Sheet with settings appropriate to your application and protection design. AC and DC elementary schematics and wiring diagrams for this relay installation. Continuity tester. Protective relay AC test source: Minimum: single-phase voltage and current with phase angle control. Preferred: three-phase voltage and current with phase angle control.

Procedure
1. Remove control voltage and AC signals from the 825-P by opening the appropriate breakers or removing fuses. 2. Isolate the relay Trip contact. 3. Verify correct AC and DC connections by performing point-to-point continuity checks on the associated circuits. 4. Apply AC or DC control voltage to the relay. 5. After the relay is energized, the front-panel green ENABLE LED illuminates. 6. Connect a PC to the relay using an appropriate serial cable. 7. Start the PC terminal emulation software and establish communication with the relay. (See Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications for more information on serial port communications.) 8. Set the correct relay time and date using either the front-panel or serial port commands. 9. Using the SET, SET P, and SET M serial port commands, enter the relay settings from the settings sheets for your application. 10. If you are connecting an external RTD scanner, follow the substeps below; otherwise continue with Step 11. a. Connect the fiber-optic cable to the module fiber-optic output. b. Plug relay end of the fiber-optic cable into the relay fiber-optic input. 11. Verify the relay AC connections.
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Testing and Troubleshooting

8-3

12. Connect the AC test source current or voltage to the relay side of the open breaker or contactor. If voltage transformers are used, apply the AC voltage signal to the relay-side of an open disconnect block, located between the secondary side of the voltage transformer and the relay. If you set the relay to accept phase-to-ground voltages (DELTA_Y = Wye), set current and/or voltage phase angles as shown in Figure 8.1. If you set the relay to accept delta voltages (DELTA_Y = Delta), set current and/or voltage phase angles as shown in Figure 8.2. 13. Apply rated current. Note: If current transformers are used, apply the AC current signal to the converter module side of an open CT-shorting disconnect block, located between the secondary side of the current transformer and the MCM converter module. 14. If the relay is equipped with voltage inputs, apply rated voltage for your application. 15. Use the front-panel METER VALUES > INSTANTANEOUS METER function or serial port METER command to verify that the relay is measuring the magnitude and phase angle of both voltage and current correctly, taking into account the relay PTR and CTR1 settings and the fact that the quantities are displayed in primary units. 16. If you are using a core balance current transformer, apply a single-phase current (A-Phase) as described in Step 11. Do not apply voltage. 17. Verify that the relay is measuring the magnitude and phase angle of the GF Current-Core Balance correctly. The expected magnitude is (Applied Phase Current) (CTRN). The expected phase angle is zero.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

8-4

Testing and Troubleshooting

Figure 8.1 Three-Phase Wye AC Connections


VC VB

+120 VA 120 PHROT = ABC

+120 VA 120 PHROT = ACB

VB VC When setting Phase Rotation = ABC, set angle Va = angle Ia = 0 set angle Vb = angle Ib = 120 set angle Vc = angle Ic = 120 When setting Phase Rotation = ACB, set angle Va = angle Ia = 0 set angle Vb = angle Ib = 120 set angle Vc = angle Ic = 120

Figure 8.2 Three-Phase Open-Delta AC Connections


VAB 60 VCB VCB

60

VAB PHROT = ABC

PHROT = ACB When setting set angle Ia = 0 Phase Rotation = ACB, set angle Ib = 120 set angle Ic = 120 set angle Vab = 30 set angle Vcb = 90

When setting set angle Ia = 0 Phase Rotation = ABC, set angle Ib = 120 set angle Ic = 120 set angle Vab = +30 set angle Vcb = +90

18. Verify control input connections. Check the control input status in the relay using the front-panel MAIN > TARGETS > ROW 9 function. As the appropriate voltage is applied across input common and input, its corresponding position in Row 9 changes from zero to one.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Testing and Troubleshooting

8-5

19. Verify output contact operation: a. Disconnect the MCM converter module cable from the connector on the rear panel of the 825-P. The front-panel displays the following: STATUS FAIL MCM/CWE Failure The 825-P Trip relay and AUX1 (Alarm) relay are now energized. b. Set AUX2C = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. This causes the AUX2 contact to close. c. Repeat the process for AUX3AUX6, if present. Ensure that each contact closure produces the result that you require in its associated annunciation, control, or trip circuit. d. Reconnect the MCM converter module cable to the 825-P. e. Select STATUS from the front-panel display menu and press the Enter push button. The front-panel displays the following: Confirm Hardware Config (Enter) f. Press the Enter push button. The front-panel displays the following: Accept Config? Yes No g. Select Yes and press the Enter push button. The front-panel displays the following: Config Accepted. Enter to Restart h. Press the Enter push button. The 825-P restarts and the ENABLE LED illuminates to indicate that the MCM module is recognized. 20. Perform any protection element tests using the individual element test procedures in Selected Functional Tests on page 8-6. Perform only enough tests to prove that the relay operates as intended; exhaustive element performance testing is not necessary for commissioning. 21. Connect the relay for tripping duty. 22. Verify that any settings changed during the tests performed in Step 19 and Step 20 are changed back to the correct values for your application.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

8-6

Testing and Troubleshooting

23. Prepare the relay for operation by clearing the relay data buffers using the serial port commands in Table 8.1. This prevents data generated during commissioning testing from being confused with operational data collected later.
Table 8.1 Serial Port Commands That Clear Relay Data Buffers
Serial Port Command MOT R SUM R SER R Task Performed Clear Motor Statistics buffers. Resets Event Report and Summary Command buffers. Resets Sequential Events Record buffer.

24. Start the motor only when it is safe to do so. 25. Verify the following AC quantities using the front-panel METER or serial port METER command. Phase current magnitudes must be nearly equal. Phase current angles must be balanced, have proper phase rotation, and have the appropriate phase relationship to the phase voltages. 26. If your relay is equipped with voltage inputs, check the following: Phase voltage magnitudes must be nearly equal. Phase voltage phase angles must be balanced and have proper phase rotation. The 825-P relay in now ready for continuous service.

Selected Functional Tests


Phase Current Measuring Accuracy
1. Connect the current source to the MCM converter module, as shown in Figure 8.3.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Testing and Troubleshooting

8-7

Figure 8.3 Current Source Connections

IC IB Current Test Source IA 1 3 MCM 2 IN 4 6 5 Cable with plugs 825-P

2. Using the front-panel or the serial port SHOW command, record the Phase CT Ratio and Phase Rotation setting values. 3. Set the phase current angles to apply balanced three-phase currents in accordance with the Phase Rotation setting. Refer to Figure 8.1 on page 8.4. 4. Set each phase current magnitude equal to the values listed in Column 1 of Table 8.2. Use the front-panel to view the phase current values. Relay displays the applied current magnitude times the CT Ratio setting.
Table 8.2 Phase Current Measuring Accuracy |I| Expected Applied Reading (A secondary) CTR1 x |I| minimum mid-range maximum APhase Reading (A primary) BPhase Reading (A primary) CPhase Reading (A primary)

Minimum, mid-range, and maximum refer to the Ie setting range for a given MCM converter module. These converter module current ranges are: 825-MCM2 (0.52.5)
825-MCM20 (2.520) 825-MCM180 (20180)

825-MCM630/N (160630)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

8-8

Testing and Troubleshooting

Current Unbalance Element Accuracy


1. Connect the current source to the MCM module as shown in Figure 8.3 on page 8.7. 2. Using the front-panel SET/SHOW function or the serial port SHOW command, record the Phase CT Ratio, Phase Rotation, and Motor FLA (Ie) setting values. 3. Set the phase current angles to apply balanced three-phase currents in accordance with the Phase Rotation setting. See Figure 8.1 on page 8.4. 4. Apply the appropriate magnitude for each phase current as shown in column 1 of Table 8.3
Table 8.3 Current Unbalance Measuring Accuracy |I| Applied (A secondary) Expected Reading (%) |IA| = 0.9 FLA |IB| = FLA |IC| = FLA |IA| = 0.75 FLA |IB| = FLA |IC| = FLA |IA| = FLA |IB| = 1.2 FLA |IC| = 1.2 FLA |IA| = 0.9 FLA |IB| = 1.1 FLA |IC| = 1.1 FLA 13% 12% 17% 7% Actual Reading (%)

Power and Power Factor Measuring Accuracy


The following tests assume use of an MCM2 or MCM20 converter module.

Wye-Connected Voltages
Perform the following steps to test wye-connected voltages: 1. Connect the current source to the MCM module, as shown in Figure 8.3 on page 8.7. 2. Connect the voltage source to the 825-P, as shown in Figure 8.4. Make sure that Xfmt Connection = Wye.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Testing and Troubleshooting

8-9

Figure 8.4 Wye Voltage Source Connections


VA L1

VB Voltage Test Source

L2 825-P

VC

L3

VN

3. Using the front-panel SET/SHOW or the serial port SHOW command, record the Phase CT Ratio, Phase VT Ratio, and Phase Rotation setting values. 4. Apply the current and voltage quantities shown in Column 1 of Table 8.4. Values are given for Phase Rotation = ABC and Phase Rotation = ACB. 5. Use the front-panel METER function or the serial port MET command to verify the results.
Table 8.4 Power Quantity AccuracyWye Voltages Applied Currents and Voltages PHROT = ABC Ia = 2.5 26 Ib = 2.5 146 Ic = 2.5 +94 Va = 67 0 Vb = 67 120 Vc = 67 +120 PHROT = ACB Ia = 2.5 26 Ib = 2.5 +94 Ic = 2.5 146 Va = 67 0 Vb = 67 +120 Vc = 67 120 Real Power (kW) Reactive Power (kVAR) Power Factor (pf)

Expected: Expected: Expected: P= Q= pf = 0.4523 CTR1 PTR 0.2211 CTR1 PTR 0.90 lag Measured: Measured: Measured:

Expected: Expected: Expected: Q= pf = P= 0.4523 CTR1 PTR 0.2211 CTR1 PTR 0.90 lag Measured: Measured: Measured:

Delta-Connected Voltages
Perform the following steps to test delta-connected voltages: 1. Connect the current source to the MCM module, as shown in Figure 8.3 on page 8.7.
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

8-10

Testing and Troubleshooting

2. Connect the voltage source to the 825-P, as shown in Figure 8.5. Make sure that Xfmr Connection=Delta.
Figure 8.5 Delta Voltage Source Connections
VA L1

VB Voltage Test Source

L2 825-P

VC

L3

VN

3. Using the front-panel SET/SHOW or the serial port SHOW command, record the Phase CT Ratio, Phase VT Ratio, and Phase Rotation setting values. 4. Apply the current and voltage quantities shown in Column 1 of Table 8.5. Values are given for Phase Rotation = ABC and Phase Rotation = ACB. 5. Use the front-panel METER or the serial port MET command to verify the results.
Table 8.5 Power Quantity AccuracyDelta Voltages Applied Currents and Voltages PHROT = ABC Ia = 2.5 26 Ib = 2.5 146 Ic = 2.5 +94 Vab = 120 +30 Vbc = 120 90 PHROT = ACB Ia = 2.5 26 Ib = 2.5 +94 Ic = 2.5 146 Vab = 120 30 Vbc = 120 +90 Real Power (kW) Reactive Power (kVAR) Power Factor (pf)

Expected: Expected: Expected P= Q= pf = 0.4677 CTR1 PTR 0.2286 CTR1 PTR 0.90 lag Measured: Measured: Measured:

Expected: Expected: Expected: P= Q= pf = 0.4677 CTR1 PTR 0.2286 CTR1 PTR 0.90 lag Measured: Measured: Measured:

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Testing and Troubleshooting

8-11

Periodic Tests (Routine Maintenance)


Because the 825-P is equipped with extensive self-tests, the most effective maintenance task is to monitor the front-panel messages after a self-test failure. In addition, review each relay event report generated by a fault. Such reviews frequently reveal problems with equipment external to the relay, such as instrument transformers and control wiring. The 825-P does not require specific routine tests, but your operation standards can require some degree of periodic relay verification. If you need or wish to perform periodic relay verification, the following checks are recommended.

Relay Status Verification


Use the front-panel STATUS or serial port STATUS command to verify that the relay self-tests have not detected any WARN or FAIL conditions.

Meter Verification
Verify that the relay is correctly measuring current and voltage (if included) by comparing the relay meter readings to separate external meters.

Control Input Verification


Using the front-panel MAIN > TARGETS > ROW 9 function, check the control input status in the relay. As the appropriate voltage is applied across input and input common, its corresponding position in Row 9 changes from zero to one.

Contact Output Verification


Disconnect the MCM converter module cable from the connector on the rear panel of the 825-P. Using the front-panel MAIN > TARGETS > ROW 3 function, check that MCM/CWEFLT, Bit 0, is equal to one. Using the SET M command, make TRIPC = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 which closes the Trip contact. Set AUX2C = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. This causes the AUX2 contact to close. Repeat the process for AUX3AUX6, if present. Ensure that each contact closure produces the result that you need in its associated annunciation, control, or trip circuit. (Remove control power to close the AUX1 (Alarm) contact.)

Self-Tests
The 825-P runs a variety of self-tests. As shown in Table 8.6, when the relay detects certain self-test failures, the Critical Alarm Status is latched. A latched Critical Alarm Status closes the Trip contact and displays the associated message on the front panel.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

8-12

Testing and Troubleshooting

When the Critical Alarm Status column in Table 8.6 shows Not Latched, the Trip contact will not close because of the self-test failure. However, the associated message (if present) is displayed on the front panel. All self-test failure messages are automatically sent to the serial port.
Table 8.6 Relay Self-Tests (Sheet 1 of 2) Self-Test Description Limits Protection Disabled on Failure Yes Yes Checksum Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 50 mV 50 mV <3.43V >3.13V <3.07V >3.53V <5.2V >4.8V <5.4V >4.65V <2.60V >2.42V No No No Yes No Yes No Critical Front-Panel Message on Alarm Status Failure Latched Latched Latched Latched Latched Latched Not Latched Latched Latched Latched Latched Latched Latched Not Latched Not Latched Not Latched Latched Not Latched Latched Not Latched +5V FAIL +3.3V FAIL VT CALIBRATION FAILED CT CALIBRATION FAILED I/O BOARD FAILURE DEVICENET BOARD FAILURE Vector nn CLOCK STOPPED External RAM FAILED Coldfire RAM FAILED CR_RAM FAILED PROGRAM MEMORY FAILED EEPROM FAILED FLASH FAILED

External RAM Internal RAM CR_RAM Code Flash Mainboard EEPROM Data Flash Front Panel Voltage Board Current Board I/O Board DeviceNet Board CPU Exception Vector Loss of MCU Crystal

Performs a read/write test on system RAM Performs a read/write test on CPU RAM Performs a checksum test on the active copy of settings

Checksum is computed on code Checksum base Checksum is computed on critical data Checksum is computed on critical data Check if ID register matches expected Check if ID register matches part number Check if ID register matches part number Check if ID register matches part number DeviceNet card does not respond in 500 ms. CPU error Clock stopped Checksum Checksum

Current Board A/D Measure DC offset at each Offset input channel Voltage Board A/D Measure DC offset at each Offset input channel +3.3V Warn +3.3V Fail +5V Warn +5V Fail +2.5V Warn Measure +3.3V power supply Measure +3.3V power supply Measure +5V power supply Measure +5V power supply Measure +2.5V power supply

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Testing and Troubleshooting

8-13

Table 8.6 Relay Self-Tests (Sheet 2 of 2) Self-Test Description Limits Protection Disabled on Failure Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes < 2.7V No No >40 C <+85 C >+100 C No Yes Yes Critical Front-Panel Message on Alarm Status Failure Latched Not Latched Latched Not Latched Latched Not Latched Latched Latched Latched Not Latched Not Latched Not Latched Latched Latched 5V FAIL CT BOARD ADC FAILURE PT BOARD ADC FAILURE CLOCK BATTERY WARN RTC WARN TEMPERATURE WARN TEMPERATURE FAIL FPGA FAIL 1.25V FAIL +3.75V FAIL +2.5V FAIL

+2.5V Fail +3.75V Warn +3.75V Fail -1.25V Warn -1.25V Fail -5V Warn -5V Fail

Measure +2.5V power supply Measure +3.75 power supply Measure +3.75 power supply

<2.68V >2.32V <3.90V >3.60V <4.02V >3.48V

Measure 1.25V power supply >1.27V <1.20V Measure 1.25V power supply >1.33V <1.16V Measure 5V power supply Measure 5V power supply >5.2V <4.8V >5.4V <4.65V

CT Board A/D Fail Check received data PT Board A/D Fail Check received data Clock Battery Warn Check battery voltage level RTC Chip Unable to communicate with clock or fails time-keeping test

Temperature Warn Measure internal relay temperature Temperature Fail Mainboard FPGA Measure internal relay temperature Fail if mainboard Field Programmable Gate Array does not accept program Fail if the detected external converter module does not match the part number

MCM/CWE Type

No

MCM/CWE FAIL

Back-plane comms Fail if GPSB is busy two diagnostics processing intervals in a row

Yes

Latched

GPSB FAIL

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

8-14

Testing and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Table 8.7 Troubleshooting Problem The relay enable front-panel LED is not illuminated.

Refer to Table 8.7 for troubleshooting instructions for particular situations.

Possible Cause

Solution

Input power is not present or a fuse is blown. Verify that input power is present. Check fuses continuity. Self-test failure. View the self-test failure message on the front-panel display. Press the Esc push button to activate the display. Verify input power and fuse continuity. Verify input wiring.

The relay front-panel display does not show The relay front-panel has timed out. characters. The relay is de-energized. The relay does not accurately measure voltages or currents. Wiring error.

Incorrect Phase CT Ratio, Core B. CT Ratio, or Verify instrument transformer ratios, Phase VT Ratio setting. connections, and associated settings. Voltage neutral terminal (N) is not properly grounded. The relay does not respond to commands from a device connected to the serial port. Cable is not connected. Cable is not the correct type. The relay or device is at an incorrect baud rate or has another parameter mismatch. The relay serial port has received an XOFF, halting communications. The relay does not respond to faults. The relay is improperly set. Improper test source settings. Current or voltage input wiring error. Failed relay self-test. Verify wiring and connections. Verify the cable connections. Verify the cable pinout. Verify Device software setup. Type <Ctrl> Q to send the relay XON and restart communications. Verify the relay settings. Verify the test source settings. Verify input wiring. Use the front-panel RELAY STATUS function to view self-test results.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Appendix

Specifications

Electrical Ratings:
825-MCM Converter Modules Rated Operating Voltage Ue IEC CSA/UL Rated Impulse Strength Uimp Operating Current Range (A) Rated Continuous Thermal Current (A) Rated Saturation Current Rated Frequency Voltage Input Option Card Rated Operating Voltage Ue Operating Range Rated Continuous Voltage Rated Insulation Voltage Ui Rated Impulse Strength Uimp Rated Frequency Transition Voltage PTC Thermistor Input Type of Control Unit Max. No. of Sensors in Series Max. Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain Trip Resistance Reset Resistance Short Circuit Trip Resistance

Main Circuits

825-MCM2 825-MCM5 400V AC 240V AC 2.5 kV 825-MCM2 825-MCM5 0.5-2.5 1-5 3 6 30 60

825-MCM20 690V AC 600V AC 6 kV 825-MCM20 825-MCM180 2.5-20 20-180 24 216 240 1350 50/60 Hz 3 Hz 67300V AC (line-to-neutral) 0.801.1 Ue 300V AC 300V AC 4 kV 50/60 Hz 5 Hz

825-MCM180 825-MCM420 825-MCM630N 1,000V AC 600V AC 8 kV 825-MCM420 825-MCM630N 160-420 160-630 504 756 3400 4600

515V Mark A 6 1500 3400 150 1500 1650 25 10

2079V

A-2

Specifications

Electrical Ratings:
Supply Rated Supply Voltage Us Operating Range Rated Frequency (V AC) Max. Power Consumption Output Relays Type of Contacts Trip Aux1Aux 6 Rated Insulation Voltage Ui Rated Operating Voltage Ue Rated Impulse Strength Uimp Rated Thermal Current Ithe 120V AC Rated Operating Current Ie 240V AC Contact Rating Designation Utilization Category Contact Reliability Mechanical Durability Pickup Time Dropout Time DC Current Ratings 24V DC 48V DC 125V DC 250V DC Inputs Rated Operating Voltage Ue

Control Circuits

110240V AC, 110250V DC 0.801.1 Us 50/60 Hz 5 Hz AC: 15VA, DC: 15 W Form C DPDT Form A SPDT NO 300V AC 240V AC 4kV 5A 3A 1.5 A B300 AC15 5 mA @ 17V 10000 no load operations < 10 ms < 8 ms (typical)) 0.75 A 0.50 A 0.30 A 0.20 A IN1 and IN2 24V AC/DC 0.801.1 Ue 300V AC 4kV 50/60 Hz 5 Hz 15V 2 mA 15 mA 5V 0.5 mA 79V 2 mA 15 mA 20V 1 mA IN3, IN4 and IN5 120V AC/DC (825-PIOD) 24V AC/DC (825-PIOR)

Operating Range Rated Insulation Voltage Ui Rated Impulse Strength Uimp Rated Frequency (AC) On-State Voltage On-State Current (turn-on) Steady State Current Off-State Voltage Off-State Current

Capacity at L/R = 40 ms

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Specifications

A-3

Mechanical Ratings
Environmental Ambient Termperature Humidity (Operating) Maximum Altitude Vibration (per IEC 68-2-6) Shock (per IEC 68-2-27) Control Terminals Terminal Screw Cross Section (1 wire, stranded/solid Torque Degree of Protection Ground Screw Terminal Screw Torque Storage Operating (open) -40+85C (-40+185F) -20+60C (-4+140F) 595% Non-condensing 2000 m 3G 30 G M3 0.142.5 mm2/#2012 AWG 0.79 Nm/7lb-in IP20 #6 1.4 Nm/12 Lb-in

RTD Scanner Module


Supply Rated Supply Voltage Us Operating Range Rated Frequency Max. Power Consumption Rated Insulation Voltage Ui Rated Impulse Strength Uimp Pollution Degree Environmental Ambient Temperature Storage Operating (open) Humidity (Operating) Maximum Altitude Vibration (per IEC 68-2-6) Shock (per IEC 68-2-27) Inputs Number of input channels Type Compatibility Range Accuracy Open Circuit Detection Short Circuit Detection Control Terminals Terminal Screw Cross Section (1 wire, stranded/solid) Torque Degree of Protection 110/240V AC 0.801.2 Us 50/60 Hz 5 Hz 5 VA 300V AC 4kV 2 -40+85C (-40+185F) -20+60C (-4+140F) 595% Non-condensing 2000 m 3G 30G 12 3-wire CU10, NI100, NI120, PT100 (per IEC 60751: 1983) -50250C 2C > 250C < -50C M3 0.252.5mm2 (2412 AWG) 0.40.6 Nm (3.55.3 Lb-in) 1P20

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

A-4

Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria RF Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria Surge Immunity Test Level Performance Criteria Radiated Emissions Conducted Emissions

8kV Air Discharge 6kV Contact Discharge 1 10V/m 1 4kV (Power) 2kV (Control and Comms) 1 2kV L-E 1kV L-L 1 Class A Class A

Performance Criteria 1 requires the DUT to experience no degradation or loss of performance. Environment 2.

Metering Accuracy
Phase Currents Average Current Average Motor Load Current Imbalance Ground Fault Current (Residual) Ground Fault Current (Core Balance) Frequency Line-to-Line Voltages Average Line-to-Line Voltage Line-to-Neutral Voltages Average Line-to-Neutral Voltages Voltage Imbalance Real 3-Phase Power (kW) Reactive 3-Phase Power (kVAR) Apparent 3-Phase Power (kVA) Power Factor RTD Temperatures 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 0.1 Hz 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 5% 5% 2% 2% 2C

Standards

CSA 22.2 No. 14, EN60947-5-1, UL 508

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Specifications

A-5

Processing
AC Current and Voltage Inputs Digital Filtering Protection and Control 16 samples per power system cycle One cycle full cosine after low-pass analog filtering. Net filtering (analog plus digital) rejects DC and all harmonics greater than the fundamental. 4 times per power system cycle

Primary Current Transformers


Minimum nominal operating voltage Minimum rated primary current I1n Rated secondary current 825-MCM2 825-MCM5 825-MCM20 Class and nominal overcurrent protection Power rating Rated frequency Burden: Power consumption at max. rated current Continuous thermal current Thermal current, 1 s duration No load Designation according to IEC 60044 part 2: 5 Total measurement error (percentage): 5% within range up to rated nominal overcurrent 1%at rated nominal primary current For protection purposes Rated nominal overcurrent factor: 10X rated nominal primary current Extended rated thermal current: 120% of rated nominal primary current (if Ie motor > 87% of rated nominal transformer current) Nominal operating voltage of motor Nominal operating current of motor 1A 5A 5A 5P10 ext. 120% According to power consumption in leads and measuring circuit 50/60 Hz 825-MCM2 825-MCM5 825-MCM20 0.1 VA/phase 0.4 VA/phase 3A 24 A 250 A 600 A An open-circuit secondary is permitted, as the burden is provided in the converter module circuitry

P 10 ext. 120%

825-CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer


Ratio Current range Continuous thermal current Saturation current Thermal current, 1 s duration Rated burden at maximum rated current Rated frequency 100:1 0.5...10 A 0.5 A 30 A 25 A 0.4 V A 50/60 Hz

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

A-6

Specifications

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Appendix

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

Overview

Rockwell Automation occasionally offers firmware upgrades to enhance the performance of your relay. Since the 825-P Relay stores firmware in flash memory, changing physical components is not necessary. Upgrade the relay firmware by downloading a file from a personal computer to the relay via the front-panel serial port as outlined in the following sections.

Required Equipment
Gather the following equipment before starting this firmware upgrade: Personal computer (PC) Terminal emulation software that supports XMODEM/CRC protocol (e.g., Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal) Serial communications cable (null-modem cable) Disk containing the firmware upgrade (s.19) file

Upgrade Instructions
The instructions below assume you have a working knowledge of your personal computer terminal emulation software. In particular, you must be able to modify your serial communications parameters (baud rate, data bits, parity, etc.), select transfer protocol (XMODEM/CRC), and transfer files (e.g., send and receive binary files). 1. If the relay is in service, open its motor control circuits. 2. Connect the PC to the front-panel serial port and enter Access Level 2.

B-2

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

3. Save the current relay settings. a. Issue the following commands at the ASCII prompt:
SHO, SHO P, and SHO M.

b. Issue the L_D command to the relay. c. Type Y and press the Enter key at the following prompt:
Disable relay to send or receive firmware (Y/N)?

d. Type Y and press the Enter key at the following prompt:


Are you sure (Y/N)?

The relay sends the BOOTLDR !> prompt. 4. Type BAU 38400 and press the Enter key. This changes the baud rate of the communications port to 38400. Change the baud rate of the PC to 38400 to match the relay. 5. Begin the transfer of new firmware to the relay by issuing the REC command. 6. Type Y to erase the existing firmware or press the Enter key to abort. 7. Press any key (e.g., the Enter key) when the relay sends a prompt. 8. Start the file transfer. a. Select the send file option in your communications software. Use the XMODEM protocol and send the file that contains the new firmware (e.g., R101xxxx.S19). The file transfer takes less than 10 minutes at 38400 baud. After the transfer is complete, the relay reboots and returns to Access Level 1.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

B-3

Figure B.1 shows the screen display for the process outlined previously in Upgrade Instructions.
Figure B.1 Firmware File Transfer Process

=>>L_D <Enter> Disable relay to send or receive firmware (Y/N)? Y <Enter> Are you sure (Y/N)? Y <Enter> Relay Disabled !>BAU 38400 <Enter> !>REC <Enter> Caution! - This command erases the relays firmware. If you erase the firmware, new firmware must be loaded into the relay before it can be put back into service. Are you sure you wish to erase the existing firmware? (Y/N) Y Erasing Erase successful Press any key to begin transfer, then start transfer at the PC <Enter> Upload completed successfully. Attempting a restart 9. The relay illuminates the ENABLE front-panel LED if the relay settings were retained through the download. If ENABLE LED is illuminated, proceed to Step 10. If ENABLE LED is not illuminated or the front-panel displays STATUS FAIL EEPROM FAILURE, reload the relay settings with the following steps: a. Set the communications software settings to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. b. Enter Access Level 2 by issuing the 2AC command. c. Issue the R_S command to restore the factory default settings. The relay then reboots with the factory default settings. If the following message appears during the restart, please contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor.
Calibration settings lost, please call the factory!

d. Enter Access Level 2. e. Issue STATUS command, and verify that the relay status is OK. f. Set the relay clock and calendar using the DATE and TIME commands. g. Set the Relay and Port settings using the following commands: SET, SET M, and SET P. h. Set the relay passwords with the PAS command.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

B-4

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

10. Set the communications software settings (baud rate, number of data bits, number of stop bits) to agree with the port settings of the 825-P. 11. Issue the STATUS command, and then verify that all relay self-test results are OK. 12. Apply current and voltage signals to the relay. 13. Issue the METER command, and then verify that the current and voltage signals are correct. The relay is now ready for your commissioning procedure.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Appendix

Relay Word Bits

Overview

The protection and control element results are represented by Relay Word bits in the 825-P Relay. Each Relay Word bit has a label name and can be in either of the following states: 1 (logical 1) 0 (logical 0) Logical 1 represents an element being picked up or otherwise asserted. Logical 0 represents an element being dropped out or otherwise de-asserted. The Relay Word bits are collected into a table of 10 rows, each row containing 8 bits. The collection is called the Relay Word. Table C.1 and Table C.2 show a list of Relay Word bits and their descriptions. The Relay Word bit row numbers correspond to the row numbers used in the TAR command (see TARGET (Level 1 or 2) on page 4-19). For access from the front panel, use the following menu path:
Main Menu > Targets

Table C.3 shows additional Relay Word bits that are not available for output mapping or for the display using the TARGET command. These bits are used in the relay (e.g., Sequential Events Recorder (SER) records. (See Chapter 7: Analyzing Events, and Input Mapping and see Table 5.38.)

C-2

Relay Word Bits

Table C.1 825-P Relay Word and Corresponding TAR Command TAR 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 49T LOSSTRIP JAMTRIP 49UBT 50P1T RTDT PTCTRIP 50G1T VART 37PT 27P1T 59P1T 47T 55T SPDSTR 50N1T SMTRIP 81D1T 81D2T OTHTRIP AMBTRIP PTCFLT RTDFLT MCMFLT COMMIDLE COMMLOSS REMTRIP COMMFLT Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 49A LOSSALRM JAMALRM 46UBA RTDA 55A 50N2T 50G2T Description Overload Trip Undercurrent Trip Jam Trip Current Imbalance Trip Short Circuit Trip RTD (Winding/Bearng) Trip PCT Trip Ground Fault (Residual) Trip VAR Trip Underpower Trip Undervoltage Trip Overvoltage Trip Phase ReversalTrip Power Factor Trip Speed Switch Trip Ground Fault (Core Balance) Trip Start Time Trip Frequency 1Trip Frequency 2Trip RTD (Other) Trip RTD (Ambient) Trip PTC ErrorTrip RTD ErrorTrip MCM ErrorTrip Comm Idle Trip Comm Loss Trip Remote Trip Comm Fault Trip

Overload Warning Undercurrent Warning Jam Warning Current Imbalance Warning RTD (Winding/Bearing) Warning Power Factor Warning Ground Fault (Core Balance) Warning Ground Fault (Residual) Warning

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Relay Word Bits

C-3

Table C.1 825-P Relay Word and Corresponding TAR Command TAR 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VARA 37PA 27P2T 59P2T SPDSAL 81D1A 81D2A OTHALRM AMBALRM SALARM WARNING LOADUP LOADLOW TIMER1T TIMER2T 50P2T STOPPED RUNNING STARTING STAR DELTA START Reserved Reserved IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 Reserved Reserved Reserved TRIP AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 Reserved Description VAR Warning Underpower Warning Undervoltage Warning Overvoltage Warning Speed Switch Warning Frequency 1 Warning Frequency 2 Warning RTD (Other) Warning RTD (Ambient) Warning Setting Warning General Warning Load Control (Upper) Load Control (Lower) Timer 1 Timer 2 Short Circuit Warning Stopped State Running State Starting State Star (Wye) Starting State Delta Starting State Start Command

Input 1 State Input 2 State Input 3 State Input 4 State Input 5 State

Trip Relay State Auxiliary Relay 1 State Auxiliary Relay 2 State Auxiliary Relay 3 State Auxiliary Relay 4 State Auxiliary Relay 5 State Auxiliary Relay 6 State

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

C-4

Relay Word Bits

Definitions
Table C.2 Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 1 of 3) Row 0 Bit ENABLE TRIP * * * * * * 1 49T LOSSTRIP JAMTRIP 46UBT 50P1T RTDT PTCTRIP 50G1T 2 VART 37PT 27P1T 59P1T 47T 55T SPDSTR 50N1T 3 SMTRIP 81D1T 81D2T OTHTRIP AMBTRIP PTCFLT RTDFLT MCMFLT Definition Front-panel ENABLE LED. Front-panel TRIP LED (see Chapter 3: Front-Panel Operation) Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Thermal (Overload) Trip. Assert when the relay issues a thermal element trip because of locked rotor starting or running overload conditions. Load-Loss Trip. Assert when the relay detects a load-loss as defined by that function and its settings. Load-Jam Trip. Phase Current Unbalance Trip. Assert when the relay issues a trip in response to a current unbalance condition, as defined by that function and its settings. Definite-Time Phase Overcurrent (Short Circuit Trip Level. Winding and Bearing RTD Overtemperature Trip. Asserts when measured PTC loop resistance is greater than trip value. Definite-Time Residual Overcurrent (Trip Level. Reactive Power Trip. Assert when the relay issues a reactive power element trip. Underpower Trip. Assert when the relay issues an underpower element trip. Phase Undervoltage Trip Definite time delayed. Phase Overvoltage Trip Definite time delayed). Phase Reversal Trip. Asserts when the relay detects a phase reversal condition. Power Factor Trip. Assert when the relay issues a power factor element alarm or trip. Speed Switch Trip. Asserts when the relay does not detect a speed switch contact closure within a settable trip period from the beginning of a motor start. Definite-Time Neutral (Core Balance) Overcurrent. Asserts when Start Motor Timer times out. Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Trip Level 1). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element set point for a definite time. Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Trip Level 2). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element set point for a definite time. Other Temperature Trip. Asserts when one or more healthy Other RTD temperature exceeds the trip set points. Ambient Temperature Trip. Asserts when the healthy ambient RTD temperature exceeds its trip set point. Indicates faulted/shorted thermistor. Asserts when an open or short circuit condition is detected on any enabled RTD input, or communication with the external RTD module has been interrupted. Asserts when the MCM module detected does not agree with the relay part number.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Relay Word Bits

C-5

Table C.2 Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 2 of 3) Row 4 Bit COMMIDLE COMMLOSS REMTRIP COMMFLT * * * * 5 49A LOSSALRM JAMALRM 46UBA RTDA 55A 50N2T 50G2T 6 VARA 37PA 27P2T 59P2T SPDSAL 81D1A 81D2A OTHALRM 7 AMBALRM SALARM WARNING LOADUP LOADLOW TIMER1T TIMER2T 50P2T Definition DeviceNet Card in programming mode. DeviceNet communication fail. Remote Trip Control Input Asserted. Internal communication time-out. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Thermal (Overload) Alarm. Assert when the relay issues a thermal element alarm/warning because of locked rotor starting or running overload conditions. Load-Loss Alarm/Warning. Assert when the relay detects a load-loss as defined by that function and its settings. Load-Jam Alarm/Warning. Phase Current Unbalance Alarm. Assert when the relay issues an alarm/warning in response to a current unbalance condition, as defined by that function and its settings. Winding/Bearing RTD Overtemperature Alarm/Warning. Power Factor Alarm. Assert when the relay issues a power factor element alarm/warning. Definite-Time Neutral (Core Balance) Overcurrent (Warning Level. Definite-Time Residual Overcurrent (Warning Level. Reactive Power Alarm. Assert when the relay issues a reactive power element alarm/warning. Underpower Alarm. Assert when the relay issues an underpower element alarm/warning. Phase Undervoltage Alarm/Warning Definite time delayed. Phase Overvoltage Alarm/Warning Definite time delayed. Speed Switch Alarm. Asserts when the relay does not detect a speed switch contact closure within a settable warning period from the beginning of a motor start. Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Warning Level 1). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element set point for a definite time. Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Warning Level 2). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element set point for a definite time. Other Temperature Alarm. Asserts when any healthy Other RTD temperature exceeds its alarm/warning set point. Ambient Temperature Alarm. Asserts if the healthy ambient RTD temperature exceeds its alarm/warning set point. Pulses for the following conditions: Setting Changes, Access Level Changes, and three unsuccessful password entry attempts. Asserts when any of the protection elements (warning level) operates or when the relay detects self-test failure (see Table 8.6), RTD/PTC faults, or DeviceNet communications alarms. Asserts when the selected load parameter exceeds an upper level setting (see Table 5.28). Asserts when the selected load parameter drops below a lower level setting (see Table 5.28). Output of the Timer Function logic (see Figure 5.6). Definite-Time Phase Overcurrent (Short Circuit Warning Level.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

C-6

Relay Word Bits

Table C.2 Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 3 of 3) Row 8 Bit STOPPED RUNNING STARTING STAR DELTA START * * 9 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 * * * 10 TRIP AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 AUX6 * Definition Asserts when the motor is stopped. Asserts when the motor is running. Asserts when the protected motor is starting. Asserts when the Star-Delta Starting function issues a command to switch motor configuration to Star (see Table 5.16). Asserts when the Star-Delta Starting function issues a command to switch motor configuration to Delta (see Table 5.16). Output of the motor start logic. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Control inputs IN1IN5 (inputs IN3IN5 are optional).

Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Output of Trip Logic. Output of AUX1AUX6 mapping (outputs AUX3AUX6 are optional).

Reserved for future use.

Table C.3 Additional 825-P Relay Word Bits Row Bit THERMLO NOSLO TBSLO ABSLO SPEED2 Definition Motor Lockout Conditions. Asserted by the thermal element (THERMLO). Starts per hour function (NOSLO). Minimum time between starts (TBSLO). Anti-backspin timer (ABSLO). Asserts when control input mapped to SPEED2 asserts (see Table 5.38).

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Appendix

ASCII Port Relay Command Summary

The ASCII Port Relay Command Summary table below lists the front serial port ASCII commands associated with particular activities. The commands are shown in upper-case letters, but they can also be entered with lower-case letters.
Serial Port Command 2AC ACC ANA DAT DAT mm/dd/yyyy DAT dd/mm/yyyy DAT yyyy/mm/dd MET MET k MET T MOT MOT R or C PAS PAS 1 xxxxxxxx PAS 2 xxxxxxxx QUI SER SER n SER n1 n2 SER d1 Access Level 1, 2 0, 2 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 2 2 2 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 Command Description Go to Access Level 2. Go to Access Level 1. Test analog output (refer to Chapter 4: ASCII Serial Communications for details). View date. Enter date in MDY format if DATE_F setting is MDY. Enter date in DMY format if DATE-F setting is DMY. Enter date in YMD format if DATE-F setting is YMD. Display instantaneous metering data. Display instantaneous metering data k times, where k is 132767. Display thermal and RTD metering data. Display motor operating statistics report. Reset motor operating statistics. Show existing Access Level 1 and Level 2 passwords. Change Access Level 1 password to xxxxxxxx Change Access Level 2 password to xxxxxxxx Go to Access Level 0. Display all Sequential Events Recorder (SER) data. Display the n most recent SER records starting with record n. Display SER records n2n1, starting with n2. Display all SER records made on date d1. Page Number Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.7 Page 4.8 Page 4.8 Page 4.10 Page 4.11 Page 4.11 Page 4.11 Page 4.11 Page 4.11 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12

D-2

ASCII Port Relay Command Summary

Serial Port Command SER d1 d2 SER R or C SET SET P SET M SET name SET TERSE SHO SHO A SHO P SHO M STA STA R or C STO STR SUM SUM R or C TAR TAR n k TAR name k TAR R TIM TIM hh:mm:ss

Access Level 1, 2 1, 2 2 2 2 2 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 2 2 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 2 1, 2 1, 2

Command Description Display all SER records made from dates d2d1, inclusive, starting with d2. Reset SER data. Enter/change relay settings. Enter/change Serial Port F settings. Enter/change I/O mapping settings. For all SET commands, jump ahead to a specific setting by entering setting name, e.g., 50P1P. For all SET commands, TERSE disables the automatic SHO command after settings entry. Show relay settings. Show all relay settings: enabled and disabled/hidden. Show Serial Port F settings. Show I/O mapping settings. Display relay self-test status. Clear self-test status and restart relay. Stop motor. Start motor. View event summary reports. Reset event summary buffer. Display Relay Word Row 0 (front-panel target LEDs). Display Relay Word Row n (n = 010). Repeat k times. Display Relay Word Row containing Relay Word name. Repeat k times. Reset front-panel trip/target LEDs. View time. Set time by entering TIM followed by hours, minutes, and seconds, as shown (24-hour clock).

Page Number Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.12 Page 4.13 Page 4.13 Page 4.13 Page 4.13 Page 4.16 Page 4.18 Page 4.18 Page 4.18 Page 4.18 Page 4.19 Page 4.19 Page 4.19 Page 4.19 Page 4.22 Page 4.22 Page 4.22

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Appendix

825-P Settings Record

These settings worksheets include the definition and input range for each setting in the relay. The settings are shown in the order that they are available at the serial port and front-panel display. Some settings require an optional card or module. (See Chapter 5: Protection and Logic Functions for details. Also, for related information, see Chapter 3: Front Panel Operation.) Some of the setting ranges may be more restrictive than shown because of settings interdependency checks performed when new settings are saved. (See Table 3.3.)

SET Command

Access the settings in this sub-section from the relay front panel and the serial port with the following menu path:
Main Menu > Set/Show > Relay

Main Settings UNIT ID LINE 1 (16 Characters) UNIT ID LINE 2 (16 Characters) PHASE ROTATION (ABC, ACB) RATED FREQ. (50, 60 Hz) RID TID PHROT FNOM := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________

E-2

825-P Settings Record

Main Settings DATE FORMAT (MDY, YMD, DMY) PHASE CT RATIO (15000) (Setting forced to 1 when MCM180 or MCM630 is used) MOTOR FLA (Ie) (0.55000 A) TWO SPEED ENABLE (Y, N) DATE_F CTR1 := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________

FLA1 E2SPEED

:= _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________

CT RATIO-2nd (15000) CTR2 (Hidden if E2SPEED := N; setting forced to 1 when MCM180 or MCM630 is used) MOTOR FLA-2nd (0.55000 A) (Hidden if E2SPEED := N) CORE B. CT RATIO (12000) PHASE VT RATIO (1.00250.00) (Hidden if voltages not included) LINE VOLTAGE (10030000V) (Hidden if voltages not included) XFMR CONNECTION (Delta, Wye) (Hidden if voltages not included) FLA2 CTRN PTR VNOM DELTA_Y

:= _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________ := _______________________________________________________

Overload Set OVERLOAD ENABLE (Y, N) (All of the following overload settings are hidden if E49MOTOR := N) OL RESET MODE (Man, Auto) OL RESET LEVEL (1099%TCU) SERVICE FACTOR (1.001.50) MOTOR LRC (2.512.0 x Ie) LOCKD ROTOR TIME (1.0600.0 s) E49MOTOR := ______________________________________________________

49RSTMD 49RSTP SF LRA1 LRTHOT1

:= := := := :=

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

825-P Settings Record

E-3

Overload Set ACCEL FACTOR (0.101.50) TD1 := := := := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

RUN STATE TIME K (Auto, 12000 min) RTC1 MOTOR LRC-2nd (2.512.0 x Ie) (Hidden if E2SPEED := N) MOTOR LRT-2nd (1.0600.0 s) (Hidden if E2SPEED := N) ACCEL FACT-2nd (0.101.50) (Hidden if E2SPEED := N) RUN ST TC-2nd (Auto, 12000 min) (Hidden if E2SPEED := N) OL WARN LEVEL (OFF, 5099%TCU) START INH. LEVEL (OFF, 199%TCU) STOP COOL TIME (12200 min) OL RTD BIASING? (Y, N) (Hidden if E49RTD := N) LRA2 LRTHOT2 TD2 RTC2 TCAPU TCSTART COOLTIME ETHMBIAS

Short Ckt Set SC TRIP LEVEL (Off, 4.0012.00 x Ie) SC TRIP DELAY (0.005.00 s) (Hidden if 50P1P := Off) 50P1P 50P1D := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

SC WARN LEVEL (Off, 4.0012.00 x Ie) 50P2P SC WARN DELAY (0.005.00 s) (Hidden if 50P2P := Off) 50P2D

GF-CB Settings GF-CB TRIP LEVEL (Off, 0.0125.00 A) 50N1P GF-CB TRIP DELAY (0.005.00 s) (Hidden if 50N1P := Off) GF-CB WARN LEVEL (Off, 0.01 25.00 A) GF-CB WARN DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if 50N2P := Off) 50N1D 50N2P 50N2D := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-4

825-P Settings Record

GF-RES Settings GF-RES TRIP LEVL (Off, 0.101.00 x Ie) 50G1P GF-RES TRIP DLAY (0.005.00 s) (Hidden if 50G1P := Off) GF-RES WARN LEVL (Off, 0.10 1.00 x Ie) GF-RES WARN DLAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if 50G2P := Off) 50G1D 50G2P 50G2D := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Jam Settings JAM TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1.006.00 x Ie) LJTPU JAM TRIP DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if LJTPU := Off) JAM WARN LEVEL (Off, 1.00 6.00 x Ie) JAM WARN DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if LJAPU := Off) LJTDLY LJAPU LJADLY := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Undercurrent Set UC TRIP LEVEL (Off, 0.101.00 x Ie) UC TRIP DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if LLTPU := Off) LLTPU LLTDLY := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

UC WARN LEVEL (Off, 0.101.00 x Ie) LLAPU UC WARN DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if LLAPU := Off) LLADLY

UC START INHIBIT (01500 s) LLSDLY (Hidden if both LLAPU and LLTPU := Off)

Current Imb Set CI TRIP LEVEL (Off, 580%) CI TRIP DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if 46UBT := Off) CI WARN LEVEL (Off, 580%) CI WARN DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if 46UBA := Off) 46UBT 46UBTD 46UBA 46UBAD := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Prot Disable PROT INHIBT TIME (Off, 1240 s) OL INHIBIT TIME (Off, 1240 s) PROTBL_T THERBL_T := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

825-P Settings Record

E-5

Start Monitoring START MOTOR TIME (Off, 1240 s) START_T := ______________________________________________________ Star-Delta Set STAR-DELTA ENABL (Y, N) MAX STAR TIME (Off, 1600 s) (Hidden if ESTAR_D := N) ESTAR_D STAR_MAX := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Start Inhibit Set STARTS/HR. (Off, 115) MIN. OFF TIME (Off, 1150 min) RESTART BLK TIME (Off, 160 min) MAXSTART TBSDLY ABSDLY := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Phase Rev Set PH REV. ENABLE (Y, N) E47T := ______________________________________________________ Speed Sw Set SS TRIP DELAY (Off, 1240 s) SS WARN DELAY (Off, 1240 s) SPDSDLYT SPDSDLYA := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ PTC Settings PTC ENABLE (Y, N) PTC RESET MODE (Man, Auto) (Hidden if EPTC := N) EPTC PTCRST := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-6

825-P Settings Record

RTD Settings RTD ENABLE (Y, N) (All following RTD settings hidden if E49RTD := N) RTD RESET MODE (Man, Auto) RTD1 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) E49RTD := ______________________________________________________

RTDRST RTD1LOC

:= := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := :=

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

RTD1 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD1TY (Hidden if RTD1LOC := Off) RTD1 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD1LOC := Off) RTD1 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD1LOC := Off) TRTMP1 ALTMP1

RTD2 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, RTD2LOC OTH) RTD2 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD2TY (Hidden if RTD2LOC := Off) RTD2 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD2LOC := Off RTD2 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD2LOC := Off) RTD3 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP2 ALTMP2 RTD3LOC

RTD3 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD3TY (Hidden if RTD3LOC := Off) RTD3 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD3LOC := Off) RTD3 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD3LOC := Off) RTD4 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP3 ALTMP3 RTD4LOC

RTD4 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD4TY (Hidden if RTD4LOC := Off) RTD4 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD4LOC := Off) RTD4 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD4LOC := Off) RTD5 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP4 ALTMP4 RTD5LOC

RTD5 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD5TY (Hidden if RTD5LOC := Off) RTD5 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD5LOC := Off) TRTMP5

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

825-P Settings Record

E-7

RTD Settings (Continued) RTD5 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD5LOC := Off) RTD6 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) ALTMP5 RTD6LOC := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

RTD6 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD6TY (Hidden if RTD6LOC := Off) RTD6 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD6LOC := Off) RTD6 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD6LOC := Off) RTD7 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP6 ALTMP6 RTD7LOC

RTD7 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD7TY (Hidden if RTD7LOC := Off) RTD7 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD7LOC := Off) RTD7 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD7LOC := Off) RTD8 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP7 ALTMP7 RTD8LOC

RTD8 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD8TY (Hidden if RTD8LOC := Off) RTD8 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD8LOC := Off) RTD8 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD8LOC := Off) RTD9 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP8 ALTMP8 RTD9LOC

RTD9 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD9TY (Hidden if RTD9LOC := Off) RTD9 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD9LOC := Off) RTD9 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD9LOC := Off) RTD10 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) TRTMP9 ALTMP9 RTD10LOC

RTD10 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD10TY (Hidden if RTD10LOC := Off)

RTD10 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD10LOC := Off) RTD10 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD10LOC := Off)

TRTMP10 ALTMP10

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-8

825-P Settings Record

RTD Settings (Continued) RTD11 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH) RTD11 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) RTD11 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD11LOC := Off) RTD11 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD11LOC := Off) RTD11LOC RTD11TY TRTMP11 ALTMP11 := := := := := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

RTD12 LOCATION (Off, WDG, BRG, RTD12LOC AMB, OTH) (Hidden if RTD11LOC := Off) RTD12 TYPE (PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10) (Hidden if RTD12LOC := Off) RTD12 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD12LOC := Off) RTD12 WARN LEVEL (Off, 1250C) (Hidden if RTD12LOC := Off) RTD12TY TRTMP12 ALTMP12

WIND TRIP VOTING (Y, N) (Hidden if <2 EWDGV Winding trip temperatures are NOT Off) BEAR TRIP VOTING (Y, N) (Hidden if <2 EBRGV Bearing trip temperatures are NOT Off) TMP RTD BIASING? (Y, N) (Hidden if no ERTDBIAS RTDnLOC := AMB or if all winding RTD trip temperatures are Off)

Undervoltage Set UV TRIP LEVEL (Off, 0.601.00 x Vnm) 27P1P UV TRIP DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if 27P1P := Off) UV WARN LEVEL (Off, 0.60 1.00 x Vnm) UV WARN DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if 27P2P := Off) 27P1D 27P2P 27P2D := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Overvoltage Set OV TRIP LEVEL (Off, 1.001.20 x Vnm) 59P1P OV TRIP DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if 59P1P := Off) OV WARN LEVEL (Off, 1.00 1.20 x Vnm) OV WARN DELAY (0.0120.0 s) (Hidden if 59P2P := Off) 59P1D 59P2P 59P2D := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

825-P Settings Record

E-9

VAR Settings NEG VAR TRIP LEV (Off, 1 25000 kVAR) POS VAR TRIP LEV (Off, 1 25000 kVAR) VAR TRIP DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if both NVARTP and PVARTP := Off) NEG VAR WARN LEV (Off, 125000 kVAR) POS VAR WARN LEV (Off, 125000 kVAR) NVARTP PVARTP VARTD NVARAP PVARAP := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

VAR WARN DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if VARAD both NVARAP and PVARAP := Off)

Underpower Set (Hidden if voltages not included) UP TRIP LEVEL (Off, 125000 kW) UP TRIP DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if 37PTP := Off) UP WARN LEVEL (Off, 125000 kW) 37PTP 37PTD 37PAP := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

UP WARN DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if 37PAD 37PAP := Off)

Power Factor Set (Hidden if voltages not included) PF LAG TRIP LEVEL (Off, 0.050.99) PF LD TRIP LEVEL (Off, 0.050.99) PF TRIP DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if both 55LGTP and 55LDTP := Off) 55LGTP 55LDTP 55TD := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

PF LAG WARN LEVEL (Off, 0.050.99) 55LGAP PF LD WARN LEVEL (Off, 0.050.99) 55LDAP

PF WARN DELAY (0240 s) (Hidden if 55AD both 55LGAP and 55LDAP := Off)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-10

825-P Settings Record

Freq Settings (Frequency setting ranges shown for FNOM := 60 Hz; ranges are OFF, 45.055.0 Hz if FNOM := 50 Hz) FREQ1 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 55.065.0 Hz) 81D1TP FREQ1 TRIP DELAY (0.0240.0 s) (Hidden if 81D1TP := Off) FREQ1 WARN LEVEL (Off, 55.065.0 Hz) FREQ1 WARN DELAY (0.0240.0 s) (Hidden if 81D1AP := Off) 81D1TD 81D1AP 81D1AD := := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

FREQ2 TRIP LEVEL (Off, 55.065.0 Hz) 81D2TP FREQ2 TRIP DELAY (0.0240.0 s) (Hidden if 81D2TP := Off) FREQ2 WARN LEVEL (Off, 55.0 65.0 Hz) FREQ2 WARN DELAY (0.0240.0 s) (Hidden if 81D2AP := Off) 81D2TD 81D2AP 81D2AD

Load Control Set LOAD CONTROL SEL (Off, Current, Power, TCU) LOAD := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ LOADUPP := ______________________________________________________ I/O Settings ANALOG OUT SEL (LOAD_I, AVG_I, MAX_I, %THERM, WDG_RTD, BRG_RTD, PWR_kW, PF) AOPARM := ______________________________________________________

If LOAD := Current: LD CTL CUR UPPER (Off, 0.22.00 x Ie) LOADUPP

LD CTL CUR LOWER (Off, 0.22.00 x Ie) LOADLOWP:= := If LOAD := Power: LD CTL PWR UPPER (Off, 125000 kW) LOADUPP LD CTL PWR LOWER (Off, 1 25000 kW) If LOAD := TCU: LD CTL TCU UPPER (Off, 199%TCU)

LOADLOWP:= :=

LD CTL TCU LOWER (Off, 199%TCU) LOADLOWP:= :=

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

825-P Settings Record

E-11

Trip Inhibit CURRENT IMBALANC (Y, N) JAM (Y, N) GROUND FAULT (Y, N) SHORT CIRCUIT (Y, N) UNDERCURRENT (Y, N) START INHIBIT (Y, N) PTC (Y, N) RTD (Y, N) BLK46 BLK48 BLK50EF BLK50P BLK37 BLK66 BLK49PTC BLK49RTD := := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Relay Behavior TRIP FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) AUX1 FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) AUX2 FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) AUX3 FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) AUX4 FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) AUX5 FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) AUX6 FAIL-SAFE (Y, N) TRIPFS AUX1FS AUX2FS AUX3FS AUX4FS AUX5FS AUX6FS := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Timer Settings ON DELAY T1 (0240 s) OFF DELAY T1 (0240 s) ON DELAY T2 (0240 s) OFF DELAY T2 (0240 s) T1ONDLY T1OFFDLY T2ONDLY T2OFFDLY := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Front Panel Set LCD TIMEOUT (Off, 130 min) LCD CONTRAST (18) FP_TO FP_CONT := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-12

825-P Settings Record

Display Enable TIME & DATE (Y, N) GROUND CURRENT (Y, N) CURRENT IMBALANC (Y, N) FREQUENCY (Y, N) THERM CAP USED (Y, N) VOLTAGE IMBALANC (Y, N) (Hidden if voltages not included) POWER (Y, N) (Hidden if voltages not included) RTD TEMPERATURE (Y, N) (Hidden if E49RTD := N) FP_TD FP_GC FP_LA FP_MF FP_TH FP_VA FP_PE FP_RTD := := := := := := := := ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

SET M Command

TRIP B

TRIP A

TRIP D
CO MM ID LE VAR TR IP ST ART T IM E T R IP OVER LOAD T RIP CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP CO MM FA ULT R TD (O TH ) T RIP OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP * R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP

TRIP C

I/O Assignments

Main Menu > Set/Show > IO ASSIGN

PT C ER RO R

POWER FAC TOR TR IP

R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP

R TD ER RO R

SPD SWITC H TR IP

PT C TR IP

TRIP RELAY ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

825-P Settings Record

Access the settings in this sub-section from the relay front panel with the following menu path:

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004


* M CM ER RO R

GF COR E BAL T RIP

GF R ES T RIP

E-13

E-14 825-P Settings Record

AUX1 E

AUX1 B

AUX1 A

AUX1 F

AUX1 G

AUX1 H

AUX1 D

AUX1 C

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004


RT D (AMB) WAR N VAR W ARN VAR TR IP OVERLOAD WAR N CO MM ID LE ST ART T IM E T R IP OVER LOAD T RIP SETT IN G WAR N U ND ER PW R W ARN UNDER CUR WAR N CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP GENER AL WAR N JAM W ARN U ND ER VOLT W ARN RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP OVER VOLT W ARN CUR IM BAL WAR N CO MM FA ULT R TD (O TH ) T RIP UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP LOAD CT L UPPER OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP LOAD CT L LOWER * SPD SW IT CH W ARN RTD (WD G/ BRG) WAR N R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP TIMER 1 F REQ 1 W ARN POWER FAC TOR WAR N * PT C ER RO R POWER FAC TOR TR IP R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP

ST OPPED ST ATE

R UN NING ST ATE

ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST AR ST ART IN G ST ATE

D ELTA ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST ART C OMM AND

AUX1 ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

N ETW ORK C ONT ROL TIMER 2

F REQ 2 W ARN

GF COR E BAL W ARN

R TD ER RO R

SPD SWITC H TR IP

PT C TR IP

SHOR T CIRC UIT WAR N R TD (OT H) W ARN

GF RES WAR N

M CM ER RO R

GF COR E BAL T RIP

GF R ES T RIP

AUX2 E

AUX2 B

AUX2 A

AUX2 F

AUX2 G

AUX2 H
RT D (AMB) WAR N VAR W ARN OVERLOAD WAR N CO MM ID LE ST ART T IM E T R IP VAR TR IP OVER LOAD T RIP SETT IN G WAR N U ND ER PW R W ARN UNDER CUR WAR N CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP GENER AL WAR N JAM W ARN U ND ER VOLT W ARN RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP OVER VOLT W ARN CUR IM BAL WAR N CO MM FA ULT UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP LOAD CT L UPPER R TD (O TH ) T RIP OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP LOAD CT L LOWER * SPD SW IT CH W ARN RTD (WD G/ BRG) WAR N R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP TIMER 1 F REQ 1 W ARN POWER FAC TOR WAR N * PT C ER RO R POWER FAC TOR TR IP R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP TIMER 2 F REQ 2 W ARN GF COR E BAL W ARN * R TD ER RO R SPD SWITC H TR IP PT C TR IP SHOR T CIRC UIT WAR N R TD (OT H) W ARN GF RES WAR N * M CM ER RO R GF COR E BAL T RIP GF R ES T RIP

AUX2 D

AUX2 C

ST OPPED ST ATE

R UN NING ST ATE

ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST AR ST ART IN G ST ATE

D ELTA ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST ART C OMM AND

AUX2 ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

N ETW ORK C ONT ROL

825-P Settings Record

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-15

E-16 825-P Settings Record

AUX3 E

AUX3 B

AUX3 A

AUX3 F

AUX3 G

AUX3 H

AUX3 D

AUX3 C

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004


RT D (AMB) WAR N VAR W ARN OVERLOAD WAR N CO MM ID LE ST ART T IM E T R IP VAR TR IP OVER LOAD T RIP SETT IN G WAR N U ND ER PW R W ARN UNDER CUR WAR N CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP GENER AL WAR N JAM W ARN U ND ER VOLT W ARN RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP OVER VOLT W ARN CUR IM BAL WAR N CO MM FA ULT R TD (O TH ) T RIP UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP LOAD CT L UPPER OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP LOAD CT L LOWER * SPD SW IT CH W ARN RTD (WD G/ BRG) WAR N R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP TIMER 1 F REQ 1 W ARN POWER FAC TOR WAR N * PT C ER RO R POWER FAC TOR TR IP R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP

ST OPPED ST ATE

R UN NING ST ATE

ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST AR ST ART IN G ST ATE

D ELTA ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST ART C OMM AND

AUX3 ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

N ETW ORK C ONT ROL TIMER 2

F REQ 2 W ARN

GF COR E BAL W ARN

R TD ER RO R

SPD SWITC H TR IP

PT C TR IP

SHOR T CIRC UIT WAR N R TD (OT H) W ARN

GF RES WAR N

M CM ER RO R

GF COR E BAL T RIP

GF R ES T RIP

AUX4 E

AUX4 B

AUX4 A

AUX4 F

AUX4 G

AUX4 H
RT D (AMB) WAR N VAR W ARN OVERLOAD WAR N CO MM ID LE ST ART T IM E T R IP VAR TR IP OVER LOAD T RIP SETT IN G WAR N U ND ER PW R W ARN UNDER CUR WAR N CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP GENER AL WAR N JAM W ARN U ND ER VOLT W ARN RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP OVER VOLT W ARN CUR IM BAL WAR N CO MM FA ULT UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP LOAD CT L UPPER R TD (O TH ) T RIP OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP LOAD CT L LOWER * SPD SW IT CH W ARN RTD (WD G/ BRG) WAR N R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP TIMER 1 F REQ 1 W ARN POWER FAC TOR WAR N * PT C ER RO R POWER FAC TOR TR IP R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP TIMER 2 F REQ 2 W ARN GF COR E BAL W ARN * R TD ER RO R SPD SWITC H TR IP PT C TR IP SHOR T CIRC UIT WAR N R TD (OT H) W ARN GF RES WAR N * M CM ER RO R GF COR E BAL T RIP GF R ES T RIP

AUX4 D

AUX4 C

ST OPPED ST ATE

R UN NING ST ATE

ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST AR ST ART IN G ST ATE

D ELTA ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST ART C OMM AND

AUX4 ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

N ETW ORK C ONT ROL

825-P Settings Record

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-17

E-18 825-P Settings Record

AUX5 E

AUX5 B

AUX5 A

AUX5 F

AUX5 G

AUX5 H

AUX5 D

AUX5 C

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004


RT D (AMB) WAR N VAR W ARN OVERLOAD WAR N CO MM ID LE ST ART T IM E T R IP VAR TR IP OVER LOAD T RIP SETT IN G WAR N U ND ER PW R W ARN UNDER CUR WAR N CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP GENER AL WAR N JAM W ARN U ND ER VOLT W ARN RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP OVER VOLT W ARN CUR IM BAL WAR N CO MM FA ULT UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP LOAD CT L UPPER R TD (O TH ) T RIP OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP LOAD CT L LOWER * SPD SW IT CH W ARN RTD (WD G/ BRG) WAR N R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP TIMER 1 F REQ 1 W ARN POWER FAC TOR WAR N * PT C ER RO R POWER FAC TOR TR IP R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP

ST OPPED ST ATE

R UN NING ST ATE

ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST AR ST ART IN G ST ATE

D ELTA ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST ART C OMM AND

AUX5 ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

N ETW ORK C ONT ROL TIMER 2

F REQ 2 W ARN

GF COR E BAL W ARN

R TD ER RO R

SPD SWITC H TR IP

PT C TR IP

SHOR T CIRC UIT WAR N R TD (OT H) W ARN

GF RES WAR N

M CM ER RO R

GF COR E BAL T RIP

GF R ES T RIP

AUX6 E

AUX6 B

AUX6 A

AUX6 F

AUX6 G

AUX6 H
RT D (AMB) WAR N VAR W ARN OVERLOAD WAR N CO MM ID LE ST ART T IM E T R IP VAR TR IP OVER LOAD T RIP SETT IN G WAR N U ND ER PW R W ARN UNDER CUR WAR N CO MM LOSS F REQ 1 T RIP UN DER PWR T RIP U ND ER C UR REN T T RIP GENER AL WAR N JAM W ARN U ND ER VOLT W ARN RE MOT E TR IP F REQ 2 T RIP OVER VOLT W ARN CUR IM BAL WAR N CO MM FA ULT UN DER VOLT TR IP J AM TR IP LOAD CT L UPPER R TD (O TH ) T RIP OVER VOLT TR IP C UR IMBAL T RIP LOAD CT L LOWER * SPD SW IT CH W ARN RTD (WD G/ BRG) WAR N R TD (A MB) T RIP PHASE REV TR IP SH ORT C IR CU IT T RIP TIMER 1 F REQ 1 W ARN POWER FAC TOR WAR N * PT C ER RO R POWER FAC TOR TR IP R TD (W DG/ BR G) T RIP TIMER 2 F REQ 2 W ARN GF COR E BAL W ARN * R TD ER RO R SPD SWITC H TR IP PT C TR IP SHOR T CIRC UIT WAR N R TD (OT H) W ARN GF RES WAR N * M CM ER RO R GF COR E BAL T RIP GF R ES T RIP

AUX6 D

AUX6 C

ST OPPED ST ATE

R UN NING ST ATE

ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST AR ST ART IN G ST ATE

D ELTA ST ART IN G ST ATE

ST ART C OMM AND

AUX6 ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

N ETW ORK C ONT ROL

825-P Settings Record

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

E-19

E-20

825-P Settings Record

INx ASSIGN (1 selects, 0 de-selects)

EMERGENCY START DISABLE SETTINGS

SPEED SWITCH BLOCK PROTECT SPEED 2

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 Note: Each Input Function can only be mapped to one input at a time.

SET P Command

Access the settings in this sub-section from the relay front panel with the following menu path:
Main Menu > Set/Show > PORT Port F

SPEED (30038400 bps) DATA BITS (7, 8 bits) PARITY (O, E, N) STOP BITS (1, 2 bits) PORT TIMEOUT (030 min) HDWR HANDSHAKING (Y, N)

SPEED BITS PARITY STOP T_OUT RTSCTS

:= := := := := :=

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

DeviceNet Port

DeviceNet Port settings can be viewed using either the STA serial port command or the front-panel menu item Status. The settings can only be changed at the rear of the relay on the DeviceNet card.
DeviceNet Port

MAC_ID (063) ASA (8 hex characters assigned by factory) DN_Rate (125, 250, 500 kbps)

MAC_ID ASA DN_Rate

:= := :=

______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

BRK/CONT AUX REMOTE TRIP

TRIP RESET TIMER 1 TIMER 2

Appendix

Linear Parameter List

Overview

This appendix lists all accessible parameters of the 825-P relay in numerical order. The setting range for each parameter is provided to assist especially for applications where it is desireable to set values from a logic controller via a network connection. Information values provided include the following:
Value Setting Range Scale Factor Function Indicated as raw numerical values. Indicate the decimal precision associated with each parameter. This must be given close attention when writing or reading values. Indicate the factory pre-programmed values.

Default

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 1 (1) 2 (2) 3 (3)

Name PHASE ROTATION RATED FREQ. DATE FORMAT

Min 0 = ABC 1 = ACB 0 = 50 1 = 60 0 = MDY 1 = YMD 2 = DMY 1 5 0=N 1=Y 1 5 1 100 100 0 = Delta 1 = Wye

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 1 0

Units Hz

Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Main Settings

4 (4) 5 (5) 6 (6) 7 (7) 8 (8) 9 (9) 10 (A) 11 (B) 12 (C)

PHASE CT RATIO MOTOR FLA(Ie) TWO SPEED ENABLE CT RATIO-2nd MOTOR FLA-2nd CORE B. CT RATIO PHASE VT RATIO LINE VOLTAGE XFMR CONNECTION

5000 50000

1 5 0 1 5 100 3467 4160 0

1 10 1 10 1 100 1

A A V

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

5000 50000 2000 25000 30000

F-2

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 13 (D) OVERLOAD ENABLE 14 (E) 15 (F) 16 (10) 17 (11) 18 (12) 19 (13) 20 (14) 21 (15) 22 (16) 23 (17) 24 (18) 25 (19) 26 (1A) 27 (1B) 28 (1C) 29 (1D) 30 (1E) 31 (1F) 32 (20) 33 (21) 34 (22) 35 (23) 36 (24) 37 (25) 38 (26) 39 (27) 40 (28) 41 (29) 42 (2A) 43 (2B) 44 (2C) 45 (2D) 46 (2E) 47 (2F) OL RESET MODE OL RESET LEVEL SERVICE FACTOR MOTOR LRC LOCKD ROTOR TIME ACCEL FACTOR RUN STATE TIME K MOTOR LRC - 2nd MOTOR LRT - 2nd ACCEL FACT - 2nd RUN ST TC - 2nd OL WARN ENABLE OL WARN LEVEL START INH. LEVEL STOP COOL TIME OL RTD BIASING? SC TRIP ENABLE SC TRIP LEVEL SC TRIP DELAY SC WARN ENABLE SC WARN LEVEL SC WARN DELAY GF-CB TRIP EN GF-CB TRIP LEVEL GF-CB TRIP DELAY GF-CB WARN EN GF-CB WARN LEVEL GF-CB WARN DELAY GF-RES TRIP EN GF-RES TRIP LEVL GF-RES TRIP DLAY GF-RES WARN EN GF-RES WARN LEVL GF-RES WARN DLAY

Min

Max 0=N 1=Y 0 = Manual 1 = Auto

Default Scale Factor 1 0 75 101 60 100 100 0 60 100 100 0 1 85 0 18 0 0 1 100 10 10 100 1 10 10 100 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 100 100 100 10

Units %TCU xIe s min xIe s min %TCU %TCU min xIe s xIe s A s A s xIe s xIe s

Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Overload Set

10 101 25 10 10 0 = Auto 25 10 10 0 = Auto 0=N 1=Y 50 0 = Off 1 0=N 1=Y 0=N 1=Y 400 0 0=N 1=Y 400 0 0=N 1=Y 1 0 0=N 1=Y 1 0 0=N 1=Y 10 0 0=N 1=Y 10 0

99 150 120 6000 150 2000 120 6000 150 2000

99 99 2200

Short Ckt Set

1200 500

1000 0 0 1000 50 0 100 0 0 100 100 0

1200 500

2500 500

GF-CB Settings

2500 1200

100 500

GF-Res Settings

50 50 0 50 100

100 1200

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-3

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 48 (30) 49 (31) 50 (32) 51 (33) 52 (34) 53 (35) 54 (36) 55 (37) 56 (38) 57 (39) 58 (3A) 59 (3B) 60 (3C) 61 (3D) 62 (3E) 63 (3F) 64 (40) 65 (41) 66 (42) 67 (43) 68 (44) 69 (45) 70 (46)

Name JAM TRIP ENABLE JAM TRIP LEVEL JAM TRIP DELAY JAM WARN ENABLE JAM WARN LEVEL JAM WARN DELAY UC TRIP ENABLE UC TRIP LEVEL UC TRIP DELAY UC WARN ENABLE UC WARN LEVEL UC WARN DELAY UC START INHIBIT CI TRIP ENABLE CI TRIP LEVEL CI TRIP DELAY CI WARN ENABLE CI WARN LEVEL CI WARN DELAY PROT INHIBT TIME OL INHIBIT TIME START MOTOR TIME STAR-DELTA ENABL MAX STAR TIME STARTS/HR MIN. OFF TIME RESTART BLK TIME PH REV. ENABLE SS TRIP DELAY SS WARN DELAY PTC ENABLE PTC RESET MODE

Min 0=N 1=Y 100 0 0=N 1=Y 100 0 0=N 1=Y 10 0 0=N 1=Y 10 0 0 0=N 1=Y 5 0 0=N 1=Y 5 0 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 0=N 1=Y 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 0=N 1=Y 0 = Off 0 = Off

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 100 10 100 10 100 10 100 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Units xIe s xIe s xIe s xIe s s % s s s s s s s min min s s

Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Jam Settings

600 1200

200 0 0 200 50 0 50 50 0 50 100 0 0 15 5 0 10 10 0 0 0 0

600 1200

Undercurrent Set

100 1200

100 1200 1500

Current Imb Set

80 240

Prot. Disable Start Monitoring Star Delta Set Start Inhbt Set Antibackspin Phase Rev Set Speed Sw Set

80 240 240 240 240

71 (47) 72 (48) 73 (49) 74 (4A) 75 (4B) 76 (4C) 77 (4D) 78 (4E) 79 (4F)

600 15 150 60

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

240 240

PTC Settings

0=N 1=Y 0 = Manual 1 = Auto

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-4

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 80 (50) 81 (51) 82 (52)

Name RTD ENABLE RTD RESET MODE RTD1 LOCATION

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

83 (53)

RTD1 TYPE

84 (54) 85 (55) 86 (56)

RTD1 TRIP LEVEL RTD1 WARN LEVEL RTD2 LOCATION

RTD Settings (continued on next page)

87 (57)

RTD2 TYPE

88 (58) 89 (59) 90 (5A)

RTD2 TRIP LEVEL RTD2 WARN LEVEL RTD3 LOCATION

91 (5B)

RTD3 TYPE

92 (5C) 93 (5D) 94 (5E)

RTD3 TRIP LEVEL RTD3 WARN LEVEL RTD4 LOCATION

0=N 1=Y 0 = Manual 1 = Auto 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 250 0 = Off 250 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 250 0 = Off 250 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 250 0 = Off 250 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Get/Set

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Get/Set

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-5

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 95 (5F)

Name RTD4 TYPE

Min 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off

Max

Default Scale Factor 0

Units

Access Get/Set

96 (60) 97 (61) 98 (62)

RTD4 TRIP LEVEL RTD4 WARN LEVEL RTD5 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

99 (63)

RTD5 TYPE

Get/Set

100 (64) 101 (65) 102 (66)

RTD5 TRIP LEVEL RTD5 WARN LEVEL RTD6 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

103 (67) RTD Settings (continued) 104 (68) 105 (69) 106 (6A)

RTD6 TYPE

Get/Set

RTD6 TRIP LEVEL RTD6 WARN LEVEL RTD7 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

107 (6B)

RTD7 TYPE

Get/Set

108 (6C) 109 (6D) 110 (6E)

RTD7 TRIP LEVEL RTD7 WARN LEVEL RTD8 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

111 (6F)

RTD8 TYPE

Get/Set

112 (70) 113 (71)

RTD8 TRIP LEVEL RTD8 WARN LEVEL

250 250

0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-6

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 114 (72)

Name RTD9 LOCATION

Min 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0 = Off 1 = Wdg 2 = Brg 3 = Amb 4 = Oth 0 = Pt100 1 = Ni100 2 = Ni120 3 = Cu10 0 = Off 0 = Off 0=N 1=Y 0=N 1=Y 0=N 1=Y

Max

Default Scale Factor 0

Units

Access Get/Set

115 (73)

RTD9 TYPE

Get/Set

116 (74) 117 (75) 118 (76)

RTD9 TRIP LEVEL RTD9 WARN LEVEL RTD10 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

119 (77)

RTD10 TYPE

Get/Set

120 (78) 121 (79) 122 (7A) RTD Settings (continued) 123 (7B)

RTD10 TRIP LEVEL RTD10 WARN LEVEL RTD11 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

RTD11 TYPE

Get/Set

124 (7C) 125 (7D) 126 (7E)

RTD11 TRIP LEVEL RTD11 WARN LEVEL RTD12 LOCATION

250 250

0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

127 (7F)

RTD12 TYPE

Get/Set

128 (80) 129 (81) 130 (82) 131 (83) 132 (84)

RTD12 TRIP LEVEL RTD12 WARN LEVEL WIND TRIP VOTING BEAR TRIP VOTING TMP RTD BIASING?

250 250

0 0 0 0 0

1 1

C C

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-7

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 133 (85) 134 (86) 135 (87) 136 (88) 137 (89) 138 (8A) 139 (8B) 140 (8C) 141 (8D) 142 (8E) 143 (8F) 144 (90) 145 (91) 146 (92) 147 (93) 148 (94) 149 (95) 150 (96) 151 (97) 152 (98) 153 (99) 154 (9A) 155 (9B) 156 (9C) 157 (9D) 158 (9E) 159 (9F) 160 (A0)

Name UV TRIP ENABLE UV TRIP LEVEL UV TRIP DELAY UV WARN ENABLE UV WARN LEVEL UV WARN DELAY OV TRIP ENABLE OV TRIP LEVEL OV TRIP DELAY OV WARN ENABLE OV WARN LEVEL OV WARN DELAY NEG VAR TRIP EN NEG VAR TRIP LEV POS VAR TRIP EN POS VAR TRIP LEV VAR TRIP DELAY NEG VAR WARN EN NEG VAR WARN LEV POS VAR WARN EN POS VAR WARN LEV VAR WARN DELAY UP TRIP ENABLE UP TRIP LEVEL UP TRIP DELAY UP WARN ENABLE UP WARN LEVEL UP WARN DELAY

Min 0=N 1=Y 60 0 0=N 1=Y 60 0 0=N 1=Y 100 0 0=N 1=Y 100 0 0=N 1=Y 1 0=N 1=Y 1 0 0=N 1=Y 1 0=N 1=Y 1 0 0=N 1=Y 1 0 0=N 1=Y 1 0

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 100 10 100 10 100 10 100 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Units xVnm s xVnm s xVnm s xVnm s kVAR kVAR s kVAR kVAR s kW s kW s

Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Undervoltage Set

100 1200

80 0 0 80 50 0 110 0 0 110 50 0 25000 0 25000 1 0 25000 0

100 1200

Overvoltage Set

120 1200

120 1200

25000

25000 240

VAR Settings

25000

25000 240

25000 1 0 25000 1 0 25000 1

Underpower Set

25000 240

25000 240

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-8

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 161 (A1) 162 (A2) 163 (A3) 164 (A4) 165 (A5) 166 (A6) 167 (A7) 168 (A8) 169 (A9) 170 (AA) 171 (AB) 172 (AC) 173 (AD) 174 (AE) 175 (AF) 176 (B0)

Name PF LAG TRIP ENBL PF LAG TRIP LEVL PF LD TRIP ENABL PF LD TRIP LEVL PF TRIP DELAY PF LAG WARN ENBL PF LAG WARN LEVL PF LD WARN ENABL PF LD WARN LEVL PF WARN DELAY FREQ1 TRIP ENABL FREQ1 TRIP LEVEL FREQ1 TRIP DELAY FREQ1 WARN ENABL FREQ1 WARN LEVEL FREQ1 WARN DELAY FREQ2 TRIP ENABL FREQ2 TRIP LEVEL FREQ2 TRIP DELAY FREQ2 WARN ENABL FREQ2 WARN LEVEL FREQ2 WARN DELAY LOAD CONTROL SEL

Min 0=N 1=Y 5 0=N 1=Y 5 0 0=N 1=Y 5 0=N 1=Y 5 0 0=N 1=Y 450 0 0=N 1=Y 450 0 0=N 1=Y 450 0 0=N 1=Y 450 0

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 100 100 1 100 100 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Units s s Hz s Hz s Hz s Hz s

Access Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

99

50 0 50 5 0 50 0 50 1 0 600 10 0 600 10 0

Power Factor Set

99 240

99

99 240

650 2400

650 2400

Freq Settings

177 (B1) 178 (B2) 179 (B3) 180 (B4) 181 (B5) 182 (B6) 183 (B7)

650 2400

600 10 0 600 10 0

650 2400 0 = Off 1 = Current 2 = Power 3 = TCU 0=N 1=Y

184 (B8) Load Control Set 185 (B9) 186 (BA) 187 (BB) 188 (BC) 189 (BD) 190 (BE) 191 (BF)

LD CTL UPP ENABL LD CTL CUR UPPER LD CTL PWR UPPER LD CTL TCU UPPER LD CTL LOW ENABL LD CTL CUR LOWER LD CTL PWR LOWER LD CTL TCU LOWER 20 1 1

0 50 22500 90 0 90 12500 50

100 1 1 100 1 1

xIe kW %TCU xIe kW %TCU

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

200 25000 99 0=N 1=Y

20 1 1

200 25000 99

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-9

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 192 (C0)

Name ANALOG OUT SEL

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0

Units

Access Get/Set

193 (C1) I/O Settings

TRIP INHIBIT

194 (C2)

RELAY BEHAVIOR

Timer Settings

195 (C3) 196 (C4) 197 (C5) 198 (C6) 199 (C7) 200 (C8) 201 (C9)

ON DELAY T1 OFF DELAY T1 ON DELAY T2 OFF DELAY T2 LCD TIMEOUT LCD CONTRAST DISPLAY ENABLE

Front Panel Set

0 = Load_I 1 = %Therm 2 = Wdg_RTD 3 = Brg_RTD 4 = PF 5 = Pwr_kW 6 = Avg_I 7 = Max_I 0 = Curr.Imbalance 1 = Jam 2 = Ground Fault 3 = Short Circuit 4 = Undercurrent 5 = Start Inhibit 6 = PTC 7 = RTD 0 = Trip Fail-Safe 1 = Aux1 Fail-Safe 2 = Aux2 Fail-Safe 3 = Aux3 Fail-Safe 4 = Aux4 Fail-Safe 5 = Aux5 Fail-Safe 6 = Aux6 Fail-Safe 0 240 0 240 0 240 0 240 0 = Off 30 1 8 0 = Time & Date 1 = Ground Current 2 = Curr. Imbalance 3 = Frequency 4 = Therm Cap Used 5 = Volt Imbalance 6 = Power 7 = RTD Temp

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 15 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Get/Set

Get/Set

1 1 1 1 1 1

s s s s min

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-10

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 202 (CA)

Name TRIP ASSIGN LO

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

203 (CB)

TRIP ASSIGN HI

I/O Mapping (continued on the next page)

204 (CC)

AUX1 ASSIGN REG1

0 = Overload 1 = Undercurrent 2 = Jam 3 = Curr. Imbalance 4 = Short Circuit 5 = RTD-Wind Bear 6 = PTC 7 = GF-Res 8 = VAR 9 = Underpower 10 = Undervoltage 11 = Overvoltage 12 = Phase Reversal 13 = Power Factor 14 = Speed Switch 15 = GF-CB 0 = Start Time 1 = Frequency 1 2 = Frequency 2 3 = RTD - Other 4 = RTD - Ambient 5 = PTC Error 6 = RTD Error 7 = MCM/CWE Error 8 = Comm Idle 9 = Comm Loss 10 = Remote Trip 11 = Comm Fault 12 = Reseved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 0 = Overload 1 = Undercurrent 2 = Jam 3 = Curr. Imbalance 4 = Short Circuit 5 = RTD-Wind Bear 6 = PTC 7 = GF-Res 8 = VAR 9 = Underpower 10 = Undervoltage 11 = Overvoltage 12 = Phase Reversal 13 = Power Factor 14 = Speed Switch 15 = GF-CB

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-11

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 205 (CD) AUX1 ASSIGN REG2

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

206 (CE)

AUX1 ASSIGN REG3

I/O Mapping (continued)

207 (CF)

AUX1 ASSIGN REG4

0 = Start Time 1 = Frequency 1 2 = Frequency 2 3 = RTD - Other 4 = RTD - Ambient 5 = PTC Error 6 = RTD Error 7 = MCM/CWE Error 8 = Comm Idle 9 = Comm Loss 10 = Remote Trip 11 = Comm Fault 12 = Reseved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 0 = RTD_Amb Warn 1 = SALARM 2 = Warning 3 = Load Ctl Upper 4 = Load Ctl Lower 5 = Timer 1 6 = Timer 2 7 = Short Ckt Warn 8 = Stopped 9 = Running 10 = Starting 11 = Star 12 = Delta 13 = Start 14 = Network 15 = Reserved 0 = Overload Warn 1 = Undercurr Warn 2 = Jam Warn 3 = Curr. Imbal Warn 4 = RTD-W, B Warn 5 = Pwr Factor Warn 6 = GF-CB Warn 7 = GF-Res Warn 8 = VAR Warn 9 = Underpower Warn 10 = Undervolt Warn 11 = Overvolt Warn 12 = Spd Switch Warn 13 = Freq1 Warn 14 = Freq2 Warn 15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-12

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 208 (D0) AUX2 ASSIGN REG1

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

209 (D1)

AUX2 ASSIGN REG2

I/O Mapping (continued)

210 (D2)

AUX2 ASSIGN REG3

0 = Overload 1 = Undercurrent 2 = Jam 3 = Curr. Imbalance 4 = Short Circuit 5 = RTD-Wind Bear 6 = PTC 7 = GF-Res 8 = VAR 9 = Underpower 10 = Undervoltage 11 = Overvoltage 12 = Phase Reversal 13 = Power Factor 14 = Speed Switch 15 = GF-CB 0 = Start Time 1 = Frequency 1 2 = Frequency 2 3 = RTD - Other 4 = RTD - Ambient 5 = PTC Error 6 = RTD Error 7 = MCM/CWE Error 8 = Comm Idle 9 = Comm Loss 10 = Remote Trip 11 = Comm Fault 12 = Reseved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 0 = RTD_Amb Warn 1 = SALARM 2 = Warning 3 = Load Ctl Upper 4 = Load Ctl Lower 5 = Timer 1 6 = Timer 2 7 = Short Ckt Warn 8 = Stopped 9 = Running 10 = Starting 11 = Star 12 = Delta 13 = Start 14 = Network 15 = Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-13

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 211 (D3) AUX2 ASSIGN REG4

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

212 (D4)

AUX3 ASSIGN REG1

I/O Mapping (continued)

213 (D5)

AUX3 ASSIGN REG2

0 = Overload Warn 1 = Undercurr Warn 2 = Jam Warn 3 = Curr. Imbal Warn 4 = RTD-W, B Warn 5 = Pwr Factor Warn 6 = GF-CB Warn 7 = GF-Res Warn 8 = VAR Warn 9 = Underpower Warn 10 = Undervolt Warn 11 = Overvolt Warn 12 = Spd Switch Warn 13 = Freq1 Warn 14 = Freq2 Warn 15 = RTD-OtherWarn 0 = Overload 1 = Undercurrent 2 = Jam 3 = Curr. Imbalance 4 = Short Circuit 5 = RTD-Wind Bear 6 = PTC 7 = GF-Res 8 = VAR 9 = Underpower 10 = Undervoltage 11 = Overvoltage 12 = Phase Reversal 13 = Power Factor 14 = Speed Switch 15 = GF-CB 0 = Start Time 1 = Frequency 1 2 = Frequency 2 3 = RTD - Other 4 = RTD - Ambient 5 = PTC Error 6 = RTD Error 7 = MCM/CWE Error 8 = Comm Idle 9 = Comm Loss 10 = Remote Trip 11 = Comm Fault 12 = Reseved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-14

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 214 (D6) AUX3 ASSIGN REG3

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

215 (D7)

AUX3 ASSIGN REG4

I/O Mapping (continued)

216 (D8)

AUX4 ASSIGN REG1

0 = RTD_Amb Warn 1 = SALARM 2 = Warning 3 = Load Ctl Upper 4 = Load Ctl Lower 5 = Timer 1 6 = Timer 2 7 = Short Ckt Warn 8 = Stopped 9 = Running 10 = Starting 11 = Star 12 = Delta 13 = Start 14 = Network 15 = Reserved 0 = Overload Warn 1 = Undercurr Warn 2 = Jam Warn 3 = Curr. Imbal Warn 4 = RTD-W, B Warn 5 = Pwr Factor Warn 6 = GF-CB Warn 7 = GF-Res Warn 8 = VAR Warn 9 = Underpower Warn 10 = Undervolt Warn 11 = Overvolt Warn 12 = Spd Switch Warn 13 = Freq1 Warn 14 = Freq2 Warn 15 = RTD-OtherWarn 0 = Overload 1 = Undercurrent 2 = Jam 3 = Curr. Imbalance 4 = Short Circuit 5 = RTD-Wind Bear 6 = PTC 7 = GF-Res 8 = VAR 9 = Underpower 10 = Undervoltage 11 = Overvoltage 12 = Phase Reversal 13 = Power Factor 14 = Speed Switch 15 = GF-CB

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-15

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 217 (D9) AUX4 ASSIGN REG2

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

218 (DA)

AUX4 ASSIGN REG3

I/O Mapping (continued)

219 (DB)

AUX4 ASSIGN REG4

0 = Start Time 1 = Frequency 1 2 = Frequency 2 3 = RTD - Other 4 = RTD - Ambient 5 = PTC Error 6 = RTD Error 7 = MCM/CWE Error 8 = Comm Idle 9 = Comm Loss 10 = Remote Trip 11 = Comm Fault 12 = Reseved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 0 = RTD_Amb Warn 1 = SALARM 2 = Warning 3 = Load Ctl Upper 4 = Load Ctl Lower 5 = Timer 1 6 = Timer 2 7 = Short Ckt Warn 8 = Stopped 9 = Running 10 = Starting 11 = Star 12 = Delta 13 = Start 14 = Network 15 = Reserved 0 = Overload Warn 1 = Undercurr Warn 2 = Jam Warn 3 = Curr. Imbal Warn 4 = RTD-W, B Warn 5 = Pwr Factor Warn 6 = GF-CB Warn 7 = GF-Res Warn 8 = VAR Warn 9 = Underpower Warn 10 = Undervolt Warn 11 = Overvolt Warn 12 = Spd Switch Warn 13 = Freq1 Warn 14 = Freq2 Warn 15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-16

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 220 (DC) AUX5 ASSIGN REG1

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

221 (DD)

AUX5 ASSIGN REG2

I/O Mapping (continued)

222 (DE)

AUX5 ASSIGN REG3

0 = Overload 1 = Undercurrent 2 = Jam 3 = Curr. Imbalance 4 = Short Circuit 5 = RTD-Wind Bear 6 = PTC 7 = GF-Res 8 = VAR 9 = Underpower 10 = Undervoltage 11 = Overvoltage 12 = Phase Reversal 13 = Power Factor 14 = Speed Switch 15 = GF-CB 0 = Start Time 1 = Frequency 1 2 = Frequency 2 3 = RTD - Other 4 = RTD - Ambient 5 = PTC Error 6 = RTD Error 7 = MCM/CWE Error 8 = Comm Idle 9 = Comm Loss 10 = Remote Trip 11 = Comm Fault 12 = Reseved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 0 = RTD_Amb Warn 1 = SALARM 2 = Warning 3 = Load Ctl Upper 4 = Load Ctl Lower 5 = Timer 1 6 = Timer 2 7 = Short Ckt Warn 8 = Stopped 9 = Running 10 = Starting 11 = Star 12 = Delta 13 = Start 14 = Network 15 = Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-17

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 223 (DF) AUX5 ASSIGN REG4

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

224 (E0)

AUX6 ASSIGN REG1

I/O Mapping (continued)

225 (E1)

AUX6 ASSIGN REG2

0 = Overload Warn 1 = Undercurr Warn 2 = Jam Warn 3 = Curr. Imbal Warn 4 = RTD-W, B Warn 5 = Pwr Factor Warn 6 = GF-CB Warn 7 = GF-Res Warn 8 = VAR Warn 9 = Underpower Warn 10 = Undervolt Warn 11 = Overvolt Warn 12 = Spd Switch Warn 13 = Freq1 Warn 14=Freq2 Warn 15=RTD-OtherWarn 0=Overload 1=Undercurrent 2=Jam 3=Curr. Imbalance 4=Short Circuit 5=RTD-Wind Bear 6=PTC 7=GF-Res 8=VAR 9=Underpower 10=Undervoltage 11=Overvoltage 12=Phase Reversal 13=Power Factor 14=Speed Switch 15=GF-CB 0=Start Time 1=Frequency 1 2=Frequency 2 3=RTD - Other 4=RTD - Ambient 5=PTC Error 6=RTD Error 7=MCM/CWE Error 8=Comm Idle 9=Comm Loss 10=Remote Trip 11=Comm Fault 12=Reseved 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-18

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # Name decimal (hex) 226 (E2) AUX6 ASSIGN REG3

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

227 (E3)

AUX6 ASSIGN REG4

I/O Mapping (continued)

228 (E4)

IN1 ASSIGN

0=RTD_Amb Warn 1=SALARM 2=Warning 3=Load Ctl Upper 4=Load Ctl Lower 5=Timer 1 6=Timer 2 7=Short Ckt Warn 8=Stopped 9=Running 10=Starting 11=Star 12=Delta 13=Start 14=Network 15=Reserved 0=Overload Warn 1=Undercurr Warn 2=Jam Warn 3=Curr. Imbal Warn 4=RTD-W, B Warn 5=Pwr Factor Warn 6=GF-CB Warn 7=GF-Res Warn 8=VAR Warn 9=Underpower Warn 10=Undervolt Warn 11=Overvolt Warn 12=Spd Switch Warn 13=Freq1 Warn 14=Freq2 Warn 15=RTD-OtherWarn 0=Emergency Start 1=Disable Settings 2=Trip Reset 3=Timer 1 4=Timer 2 5=Speed Switch 6=Block Protection 7=Speed 2 8=Bkr/Cont Aux 9=Remote Trip 10=Reserved 11=Reserved 12=Reserved 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-19

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 229 (E5)

Name IN2 ASSIGN

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Units

Access Get/Set

230 (E6)

IN3 ASSIGN

I/O Mapping (continued)

231 (E7)

IN4 ASSIGN

0=Emergency Start 1=Disable Settings 2=Trip Reset 3=Timer 1 4=Timer 2 5=Speed Switch 6=Block Protection 7=Speed 2 8=Bkr/Cont Aux 9=Remote Trip 10=Reserved 11=Reserved 12=Reserved 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved 0=Emergency Start 1=Disable Settings 2=Trip Reset 3=Timer 1 4=Timer 2 5=Speed Switch 6=Block Protection 7=Speed 2 8=Bkr/Cont Aux 9=Remote Trip 10=Reserved 11=Reserved 12=Reserved 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved 0=Emergency Start 1=Disable Settings 2=Trip Reset 3=Timer 1 4=Timer 2 5=Speed Switch 6=Block Protection 7=Speed 2 8=Bkr/Cont Aux 9=Remote Trip 10=Reserved 11=Reserved 12=Reserved 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-20

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 232 (E8)

Name IN5 ASSIGN

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2000

Units

Access Get/Set

I/O Mapping (continued)

233 (E9) 234 (EA) 235 (EB) Reset Settings 236 (EC) 237 (ED) 238 (EE) 239 (EF) 240 (F0) 241 (F1) 242 (F2) 243 (F3) 244 (F4) 245 (F5) 246 (F6) 247 (F7) 248 (F8) 249 (F9) 250 (FA) 251 (FB) 252 (FC) 253 (FD) 254 (FE) 255 (FF) 256 (100)

Reserved RESET TRIP SET TO DEFAULTS RESET STAT DATA RESET HIS DATA SET SEC SET MIN SET HOUR SET DAY SET MONTH SET YEAR L1 CURRENT L1 ANGLE L2 CURRENT L2 ANGLE L3 CURRENT L3 ANGLE GF CURR (CORE B) GF-CB ANGLE GF CURR (RESID) GF-RES ANGLE AVERAGE CURRENT MOTOR LOAD CURRENT IMBAL

Date/Time Set

Current Data

0=Emergency Start 1=Disable Settings 2=Trip Reset 3=Timer 1 4=Timer 2 5=Speed Switch 6=Block Protection 7=Speed 2 8=Bkr/Cont Aux 9=Remote Trip 10=Reserved 11=Reserved 12=Reserved 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved 0=Ready 1=Reset 0=Ready 1=Reset 0=Ready 1=Reset 0=Ready 1=Reset 0 5999 0 59 0 23 1 31 1 12 2000 9999 0 65535 -1800 1800 0 65535 -1800 1800 0 65535 -1800 1800 0 65535 -1800 1800 0 65535 -1800 1800 0 65535 0 120 0 1000

100 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 10

A A A A A A xIe %

Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get/Set Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-21

Group

Voltage Data

Power Data

RTD Data

Parameter # decimal (hex) 257 (101) 258 (102) 259 (103) 260 (104) 261 (105) 262 (106) 263 (107) 264 (108) 265 (109) 266 (10A) 267 (10B) 268 (10C) 269 (10D) 270 (10E) 271 (10F) 272 (110) 273 (111) 274 (112) 275 (113) 276 (114) 277 (115) 278 (116) 279 (117) 280 (118) 281 (119) 282 (11A) 283 (11B) 284 (11C) 285 (11D) 286 (11E) 287 (11F) 288 (120) 289 (121) 290 (122) 291 (123) 292 (124) 293 (125) 294 (126) 295 (127)

Name VAB VAB ANGLE VBC VBC ANGLE VCA VCA ANGLE AVERAGE LINE VAN VAN ANGLE VBN VBN ANGLE VCN VCN ANGLE VG VG ANGLE AVERAGE PHASE VOLTAGE IMBAL REAL POWER REACTIVE POWER APPARENT POWER POWER FACTOR FREQUENCY MAX WINDING RTD MAX BEARING RTD MAX AMBIENT RTD MAX OTHER RTD RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 RTD4 RTD5 RTD6 RTD7 RTD8 RTD9 RTD10 RTD11 RTD12 RTD % TCU

Min 0 -1800 0 -1800 0 -1800 0 0 -1800 0 -1800 0 -1800 0 -1800 0 0 -32768 -32768 -32768 -100 0 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 -32768 0

Max 65535 1800 65535 1800 65535 1800 65535 65535 1800 65535 1800 65535 1800 65535 1800 65535 1000 32767 32767 32767 100 660 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 100

Default Scale Factor 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1 1 1 100 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Units V V V V V V V V V % kW kVAR kVA Hz C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C %

Access Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-22

Linear Parameter List

Parameter # decimal (hex) 296 (128) 297 (129) Overload Status 298 (12A) 299 (12B) 300 (12C) 301 (12D) 302 (12E) 303 (12F) 304 (130) 305 (131) 306 (132) 307 (133) 308 (134) 309 (135) Motor 310 (136) Statistics 311 (137) 312 (138) Group 313 (139) 314 (13A) 315 (13B) 316 (13C) 317 (13D) 318 (13E) 319 (13F) 320 (140) 321 (141) 322 (142) 323 (143) 324 (144) 325 (145) 326 (146)

Name THERM CAP USED TIME TO TRIP STARTS AVAILABLE TIME TO RESET Reserved ELAPSED TIME-mm ELAPSED TIME-hh ELAPSED TIME-dd RUNNING TIME-mm RUNNING TIME-hh RUNNING TIME-dd STOPPED TIME-mm STOPPED TIME-hh STOPPED TIME-dd % TIME RUNNING STARTS COUNT EMER START COUNT LAST RST TIME-ss LAST RST TIME-mm LAST RST TIME-hh LAST RST DATE-dd LAST RST DATE-mm LAST RST DATE-yr NO. EVENT LOGS EVENT LOG SEL. EVENT TIME ss EVENT TIME mm EVENT TIME hh EVENT DAY dd EVENT DAY mm EVENT DAY yy

Min 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Max 9990 9999 255 9999 59 23 65535 59 23 65535 59 23 65535 1000 65535 65535 5999 59 23 31 12 9999 5 5 5999 59 23 31 12 9999

Default Scale Factor 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 1 1 1 1 1

Units % s s

Access Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get/Set Get Get Get Get Get Get

Historical Data (continued on next page)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-23

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 327 (147)

Name EVENT TYPE

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor

Units

Access Get

Historical Data (continued)

328 (148) 329 (149) 330 (14A) 331 (14B) 332 (14C) 333 (14D) 334 (14E) 335 (14F) 336 (150) 337 (151) 338 (152) 339 (153) 340 (154) 341 (155) 342 (156) 343 (157)

EVENT L1 EVENT L2 EVENT L3 EVENT GF-RES EVENT GF-CB EVENT VAB/VAN EVENT VBC/VBN EVENT VCA/VCN EVENT DELTA/WYE Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

0=No Trip 1=Overload Trip 2=Lockd Rotor Trip 3=Undercurr Trip 4=Jam Trip 5=Curr Imbal Trip 6=Short Ckt Trip 7=Ground Flt Trip 8=Speed Sw Trip 9=Undervolt Trip 10=Overvolt Trip 11=Underpower Trip 12=Pwr Factor Trip 13=React Pwr Trip 14=Phase Rev Trip 15=Underfreq Trip 16=Overfreq Trip 17=RTD Trip 18=PTC Trip 19=Start Time Trip 20=MCM/CWE Fail 21=RTD Fail Trip 22=PTC Fail Trip 23=Reserved 24=Trigger 25=CommIdleLossTrip 26=Remote Trip 27=Comm Fail Trip 28=TestButton Trip 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 0=Delta 1=Wye

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

A A A A A V V V Get

Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get Get

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-24

Linear Parameter List

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 344 (158)

Name TRIP STATUS LO

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor

Units

Access Get

345 (159)

TRIP STATUS HI

Trip/Warn Data (continued on next page)

346 (15A)

WARN STATUS LO

0=Overload 1=Undercurrent 2=Jam 3=Curr. Imbalance 4=Short Circuit 5=RTD-Wind Bear 6=PTC 7=GF-Res 8=VAR 9=Underpower 10=Undervoltage 11=Overvoltage 12=Phase Reversal 13=Power Factor 14=Speed Switch 15=GF-CB 0=Start Time 1=Frequency 1 2=Frequency 2 3=RTD - Other 4=RTD - Ambient 5=PTC Error 6=RTD Error 7=MCM/CWE Error 8=Comm Idle 9=Comm Loss 10=Remote Trip 11=Comm Fault 12=Alarm Critical 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved 0=Overload Warn 1=Undercurr Warn 2=Jam Warn 3=Curr. Imbal Warn 4=Short Ckt Warn 5=RTD-W, B Warn 6=Reserved 7=GF-Res Warn 8=VAR Warn 9=Underpower Warn 10=Undervolt Warn 11=Overvolt Warn 12=Reserved 13=Pwr Factor Warn 14=Spd Switch Warn 15=GF-CB Warn

Get

Get

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Linear Parameter List

F-25

Group

Parameter # decimal (hex) 347 (15B)

Name WARN STATUS HI

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor

Units

Access Get

Trip/Warn Data (continued)

N/A

8192 (2000)

Logic Command

N/A

8193 (2001)

Reset Command

N/A

8448 (2100)

Fast Status 0

0=Reserved 1=Freq1 Warn 2=Freq2 Warn 3=RTD-Other Warn 4=RTD-Amb Warn 5=PTC Error Warn 6=RTD Error Warn 7=MCM/CWE Err Warn 8=Comm Idle Warn 9=Comm Loss Warn 10=Reserved 11=Comm Fault Warn 12=Alarm Warn 13=Reserved 14=Reserved 15=Reserved 0 = Reserved 1 = Reserved 2 = Reserved 3 = Reserved 4 = AUX 1 5 = AUX 2 6 = AUX 3 7 = AUX 4 8 = AUX 5 9 = AUX 6 10 = Reserved 11 = Reserved 12 = Reserved 13 = Reserved 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved 0 = Trip Reset 1 = Set to Defaults 2 = Reset Stat Data 3 = Reset Hist Data 4 = Reset CommCntr 5 = Reserved 6 = Reserved 7 = Reserved 0 = Tripped 1 = Warning 2 = IN 1 3 = IN 2 4 = IN 3 5 = IN 4 6 = IN 5 7 = Reserved 8 = TRIP 9 = AUX 1 10 = AUX 2 11 = AUX 3 12 = AUX 4 13 = AUX 5 14 = AUX 6 15 = Reserved

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

F-26

Linear Parameter List

Group N/A N/A

Parameter # decimal (hex) 16388 (4004) 16406 (4016)

Name Firmware Revision Error Register

Min

Max

Default Scale Factor

Units

Access Get

1 32639 0 = Settings Read Error 1 = Settings Write Error 2 = Settings Update Error 3 = Settings Resource Error 4 = Settings Locked 5 = Group Settings Error 6 = Global Settings Error 7 = Logic Settings Error 8 = Report Settings Error 9 = Front Panel Settings Error 10 = Memory Not Available 11 = Settings Prep Error 12 = Setting Changes Disabled 13 = Memory Diag Error 14 = Reserved 15 = Reserved

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Appendix

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

Overview

This appendix describes the communications features supported by the 825-P Modbus RTU option card. Complete specifications for the Modbus protocol are available from the Modicon web site at www.modicon.com. Enable Modbus protocol using the serial port settings. When Modbus protocol is enabled, the relay switches the port to Modbus protocol and deactivates the ASCII protocol. Modbus RTU is a binary protocol that permits communication between a single master device and multiple slave devices. The communication is half duplex; only one device transmits at a time. The master transmits a binary command that includes the address of the desired slave device. All of the slave devices receive the message, but only the slave device with the matching address responds. The 825-P Modbus communication allows a Modbus master device to do the following: Acquire metering, monitoring, and event data from the relay. Control 825-P output contacts and remote bits. Read the 825-P self-test status and learn the present condition of all the relay protection elements.

Installation

Mounting
The optional 825-PMB Modbus Communication Card occupies the communication expansion slot [C] in the 825-P Modular Protection System. For mounting instructions, refer to the 825-P Option Cards installation instructions, Publication 41053-261-01.

G-2

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

Wiring

5 Pin, RS 485

9 Pin, RS 232

Table G.1 RS 485 Connections (top to bottom) Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin Function Dx+ DxRx+ RxSH Definition Transmit Data (Positive) Transmit Data (Negative) Receive Data (Positive) Receive Data (Negative) Shield

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

G-3

RS 232 Connections

5 9

4 8

3 7

2 6

Table G.2 RS 232 Connections Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pin Function +5V DC RxD TxD NC GND GND NC RTS CTS Definition Receive data Transmit data No connection Signal ground Signal ground No connection Request to send Clear to send

Example
Figure 7.1 Example of wiring between a MicroLogix PLC Advanced Interface Converter (AIC) and the 825-PMB, Modbus Option Card.
1761-NET-AIC (MASTER)

825-PMB (SLAVE)

Figure 7.2 Figure 2: Example of Modbus network consisting of a MicroLogix 1500 PLC as the Master device and an 825-P and PanelView 550 as the Slave devices.
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

G-4

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

825-P Modular Motor Protection Relay (Slave Device)

MODBUS Network

(Slave Device)

(Master Device)

Commissioning

The Modbus communication card (Port 4) can be configured through the front panel or serial port using the following settings. Front panel access uses the following path: MAIN > Set/Show > Port > Port 4
Table G.3 Modbus communication card settings Setting Prompt COMM INTERFACE PROTOCOL SPEED PARITY MODBUS SLAVE ID Setting Range 232, 485 ASC, MOD 300 38,400 bps O, E, N 1 248 Factory Default 232 MOD 19,200 N 248

The following table provides settings to use for each communication card:
Table G.4 Communication card settings Setting Prompt COMM INTERFACE PROTOCOL SPEED PARITY MODBUS SLAVE ID Setting Range 232, 485 ASC, MOD 300 38,400 bps O, E, N 1 248 DeviceNet 232 MOD 19,200 N 248 Modbus 232 MOD 19,200 N 1 to 247 Empty 232 MOD 19,200 N 1

Modbus Queries
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Modbus RTU master devices initiate all exchanges by sending a query. The query consists of the fields shown in Table G.5.

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

G-5

Table G.5 Modbus Query Fields Field Slave Device Address Function Code Data Region Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) Number of Bytes 1 byte 1 byte 0250 bytes 2 bytes

The 825-P SLAVEID setting defines the device address. Set this value to a unique number for each device on the Modbus network. For Modbus communication to operate properly, no two slave devices may have the same address. The cyclical redundancy check detects errors in the received data. If an error is detected, the relay discards the packet.

Modbus Responses

The slave device sends a response message after it performs the action requested in the query. If the slave cannot execute the command for any reason, it sends an error response. Otherwise, the slave device response is formatted similarly to the query including the slave address, function code, data (if applicable), and a cyclical redundancy check value.

Supported Modbus Function Codes

The 825-P supports the Modbus function codes shown in Table G.6.
Table G.6 825-P Modbus Function Codes Codes 03h 06h 10h 60h 61h 62h 7Dh 7Eh Description Read Holding Registers Preset Single Register Preset Multiple Registers Read Parameter Information Read Parameter Text Read Enumeration Text Encapsulate Modbus Packet With Control NOP

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

G-6

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

Modbus Exception Responses

The 825-P sends an exception code under the conditions described in Table G.7.
Table G.7 825-P Modbus Exception Codes Exception Code 1 2 3 4 Error Type Description

6 8

Illegal Function The received function code is either Code undefined or unsupported. Illegal Data Address The received command contains an unsupported address in the data field. Illegal Data Value The received command contains a value that is out of range. Device Error The 825-P is in the wrong state for the requested function. This also stands for Service Failure for DeviceNet interface applications. The relay is unable to perform the requested action (i.e., cannot write to a read-only register). Busy The 825-P is unable to process the command at this time a resource is busy. Memory Error Checksum error on stored data.

In the event that any of the errors listed in Table G.7 occur, the relay assembles a response message that includes the exception code in the data field. The relay sets the most significant bit in the function code field to indicate to the master that the data field contains an error code, instead of the requested data.

Cyclical Redundancy Check

The 825-P calculates a 2-byte CRC value using the device address, function code, and data region. It appends this value to the end of every Modbus response. When the master device receives the response, it recalculates the CRC. If the calculated CRC matches the CRC sent by the 825-P, the master device uses the data received. If there is not a match, the check fails and the message is ignored. The devices use a similar process when the master sends queries.

03h Read Holding Register Command

Use function code 03h to read directly from the Modbus Register Map (Linear Parameter List) shown in Appendix F. You may read a maximum of 125 registers at once with this function code. Most masters use 4X references with this function code. If you are accustomed to 4X references with this function code, for five-digit addressing, add 40001 to the standard database address.
Table G.8 03h Read Holding Register Command (Sheet 1 of 2) Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format. 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (03h)

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

G-7

Table G.8 03h Read Holding Register Command (Sheet 2 of 2) Bytes Field 2 bytes Starting Register Address 2 bytes Number of Registers to Read 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format. 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (03h) 1 byte Bytes of data (n) n bytes Data (2250) 2 bytes CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown in Table G.9.
Table G.9 Responses to 03h Read Holding Register Query Errors Error Error Code Returned Communication Counter Increments Illegal Data Address (02h) Invalid Address Illegal Data Value (03h) Illegal Register Illegal Data Value (03h) Bad Packet Format

Illegal register to read Illegal number of registers to read Format error

TIP

The first holding register (parameter) for the 825-P ia 1. Some Modbus masters use 0 as the first holding register. This can give the appearance of data being offset by one register.

06h Preset Single Register Command

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to write directly to a database register. Refer to the Modbus Register Map in Appendix F for a list of registers that can be written using this function code. If you are accustomed to 4X references with this function code, for six-digit addressing, add 400001 to the standard database addresses. In Table G.10, the command response is identical to the command request.
Table G.10 06h Preset Single Register Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (06h) 2 bytes Register Address 2 bytes Data 2 bytes CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown in Table G.11.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

G-8

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

Table G.11 Responses to 06h Preset Single Register Query Errors Error Communication Counter Increments Illegal register address Illegal Data Address (02h) Invalid Address Illegal Write Illegal register value Illegal Data Value (03h) Illegal Write Format error Illegal Data Value (03h) Bad Packet Format Error Code Returned

10h Preset Multiple Registers Command

This function code works much like code 06h, except that it allows you to write multiple registers at once, up to 100 per operation. If you are accustomed to 4X references with the function code, for six-digit addressing, simply add 400001 to the standard database addresses.
Table G.12 10h Preset Multiple Registers Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (10h) 2 bytes Starting Address 2 bytes Number of Registers to Write 1 byte Bytes of Data (n) n bytes Data 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (10h) 2 bytes Starting Address 2 bytes Number of Registers 2 bytes CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown below:


Table G.13 10h Preset Multiple Registers Query Error Messages Error Illegal register to set Illegal number of registers to set Incorrect number of bytes in query data region Invalid register data value Error Code Returned Illegal Data Address (02h) Illegal Data Value (03h) Illegal Data Value (03h) Illegal Data Value (03h) Communication Counter Increments Invalid Address Illegal Write Illegal Register Illegal Write Bad Packet Format Illegal Write Illegal Write

60h Read Parameter Information Command

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to read parameter information from the relay. One parameter (setting) is read in each query.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

G-9

Table G.14 60h Read Parameter Information Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (60h) 2 bytes Parameter Number 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (60h) 2 bytes Parameter Number 1 byte Parameter Descriptor 1 byte Parameter Conversion 2 bytes Parameter Minimum Settable Value 2 bytes Parameter Maximum Settable Value 2 bytes Parameter Default Value 2 bytes CRC-16

The Parameter Descriptor field is defined in Table G.15:


Table G.15 60h Read Parameter Descriptor Field Definition Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Description RO: Read-only 1 when the setting is read-only H: Hidden 1 when the setting is hidden DBL: 32-bit 1 when the following setting is a fractional value of this setting RA: RAM-only 1 when the setting is not saved in nonvolatile memory RR: Read-only 1 when the setting is read-only if in running/operational if running state P: Power 1 when the setting change requires a power cycle or reset Cycle or Reset 0 Reserved Extend Reserved to extend the descriptor table

The Parameter Conversion field is defined in Table G.16:


Table G.16 60h Read Parameter Conversion Field Definition Conversion Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Type Boolean Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer Hexidecimal Integer Integer Integer Integer Enumeration Bit Enumeration Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Divisor 1 1 10 100 1000 1 1 10 100 1000 1 1 Offset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Base 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

G-10

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

Calculate the actual (not scaled) value of the parameter (setting) using Equation G.2:
value = ( ParameterValue + Offset ) Multiplier Base ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Divisor Equation G.1

Calculate the scaled setting value using Equation G.2:


value Divisor value = ---------------------------------------------- Offset Multiplier Base

Equation G.2

The relay response to errors in the query are shown Table G.17:
Table G.17 Responses to 60h Read Parameter Information Query Errors Error Error Code Returned Communication Counter Increments Illegal Register

Illegal parameter to read

Illegal Data Value (03h)

61h Read Parameter Text Command

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to read parameter text from the relay. One parameter text (setting name) is read in each query.
Table G.18 61h Read Parameter Text Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (61h) 2 bytes Parameter Number 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (61h) 2 bytes Parameter Number 16 bytes Parameter Text (setting name) 4 bytes Parameter Unites (e.g., Amps) 2 bytes CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown below:


Table G.19 61h Read Parameter Text Query Error Messages Error Illegal parameter to read Error Code Returned Illegal Data Value (03h) Communication Counter Increments Illegal Register Illegal Write

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

G-11

62h Read Enumeration Text Command

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to read parameter enumeration or bit enumeration values (setting lists) from the relay. One parameter enumeration is read in each query.
Table G.20 62h Read Enumeration Text Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (62h) 2 bytes Parameter Number 1 byte Enumeration Index 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (61h) 2 bytes Parameter Number 1 byte Enumeration Index 16 bytes Enumeration Text 2 bytes CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown below:


Table G.21 61h Read Parameter Enumeration Text Query Error Messages Error Illegal parameter to read Error Code Returned Illegal Data Value (03h) Communication Counter Increments Illegal Register

7Dh Encapsulated Packet With Control Command

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to perform control operations and another Modbus function with one query. This command will be transmitted periodically to achieve high-speed I/O processing and also serve as a heartbeat between the communication option card and the main board.
Table G.22 7Dh Encapsulated Packet With Control Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (7Dh) 2 bytes Subfunction (2000h) 1 byte Modbus Function n bytes Optional Data to Support Modbus Function (0250) 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (7Dh) 2 bytes Subfunction (2100h or 2101h) 1 byte Function Code (7Eh) n bytes Optional data to support the Modbus function (0250) 2 bytes CRC-16
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

G-12

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

The format of the relay responses to errors in the query is shown in Table G.23.
Table G.23 7Dh Encapsulated Packet Query Errors Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (7Dh) 2 bytes Subfunction (2100h or 2101h) 1 byte Function Code (7Eh) 1 bytes Function Error Code 2 bytes CRC-16

7Eh NOP Command

This function code the allows a Modbus master to perform a control operation and is used inside of the 7Dh when no regular Modbus query is required.
Table G.24 17Eh NOP Command Bytes Field Requests from the master must have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (7Eh) 2 bytes CRC-16 A successful response from the slave will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (7Eh) 2 bytes CRC-16 An example of a 7D message using 7E will have the following format: 1 byte Slave Address 1 byte Function Code (7Dh) 2 bytes Subfunction (2100h) 2 bytes Subfunction (2101h) 1 byte Function Code (7Eh) 2 bytes CRC-16

Modbus Password Control and Parameter Modification

The 825-P parameters MID, TID, Password, and the User Map Registers are settable via Modbus. Any settable parameter or reset that requires a valid password write will timeout 15 minutes after the last valid write to any of these restricted registers. Writing the password for access level change requires the 10h (preset multiple register) command. Changing the password can be done one register at a time. A device error is returned during settings save if the relay is disabled or settings are being changed on another port. Device error is also returned for attempts to write to settable values if the access level has not been changed.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

G-13

To enable modification of the settable parameters, a valid Access Level E (EAC) password must be written to the password registers using function code 10h. Note changing the password will change the password for all ports. Once a valid password has been written, then the values may be changed using standard single or multiple register writes (06h or 10h). Until a command is issued to save or discard the settings, the value returned when reading the settable parameter registers is a temporary copy. To save the modified parameters, write a 0x0001 to the Save Settings register of the Control I/O region. This is the only method that saves the changes. To discard settings, either write a 0x0001 to the Discard Settings register of the Control I/O region, write a 0x0001 to the Drop Access Level register of the Control I/O region or wait fifteen minutes since last write for access level timeout.

Modbus Serialized Events Recording Register Operation

To obtain Serialized Events Recording (SER) records using the Modbus register map perform the following steps. 1. Write the date and time for the first desired record to the Start Record Time/Date registers of the SER region of the map. 2. Read the Number of Records Available register to determine how many SER records are available on or after the selected date and time. Ten records are available for reading from the SER region of the map. 3. Write to the Selected Starting Record register to select additional records from the number available. For example, if the Number of Records available is 25, write 11 to the Selected Starting Record to read records 1120.

Modbus Load Profile Register Operation

To read load profile data from the 825-P using the Modbus map, perform the following steps. 1. Read the Load Profile 1 Name to Load Profile 12 Name registers from the Product Information region of the map. These names are returned as a NULL terminated ASCII string and provide the human readable label for the profiled data. If the load profile channel is unused, then the associated label is an empty string.

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

G-14

Modbus RTU Communications Protocol

2. Write the date and time for the first desired record to the Start Record Time/Date registers of the Load Profile region of the map. Up to 100 records are available on or after the selected date and time. Channels that are not profiling data returns a reserved value when read (see Table G.25).
Table G.25 Modbus Conversion Conversion INT INT10 INT100 INT1000 UINT UINT10 UINT100 UINT1000 LONG LONG10 LONG100 LONG1000 BITMAP ENUM STRING Description Value ranges = 3276732767 INT with scale factor of 10 (divide by 10 to obtain value) INT with scale factor of 100 (divide by 100 to obtain value) INT with scale factor of 1000 (divide by 1000 to obtain value) Value ranges from 0 to 65535 UINT with scale factor of 10 (divide by 10 to obtain value) UINT with scale factor of 100 (divide by 100 to obtain value) UINT with scale factor of 1000 (divide by 1000 to obtain value) Value ranges = 21474836472147483647, most significant word in lower address register LONG with scale factor of 10 (divide by 10 to obtain value) LONG with scale factor of 100 (divide by 100 to obtain value) LONG with scale factor of 1000 (divide by 1000 to obtain value) A bitmapped value An enumerated value A null terminated ASCII string Reserved Value 0x8000 0x8000 0x8000 0x8000 0x8000 0x8000 0x8000 0x8000 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x80000000 0x80000000

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index

AC/DC connection scenarios ............................................. 1-3 Access level 2 front-panel password entry ........................................... 3-6 password correction ..................................................... 3-8 password entry .............................................................. 3-7 Accessories, relay .............................................................. 1-3 Across the line starting ...................................................... 2-12 Analyzing Events analysis of events overview ......................................... 7-1 event summary reports basic content .......................................................... 7-1 example .................................................................. 7-5 report triggering ..................................................... 7-2 resetting the buffer ................................................. 7-2 retrieving reports .................................................... 7-2 serialized events recording (SER) report example .................................................................. 7-6 resetting the SER buffer ......................................... 7-4 retrieving SER reports ........................................... 7-3 SER triggering ....................................................... 7-2 Applications, installation ................................................... 1-3 ASCII Port Relay Command Summary access level .................................................................. D-1 serial port commands ................................................... D-1 ASCII Serial Communications operation configure terminal emulation software ................... 4-3 connect PC to relay ................................................. 4-2 required equipment ................................................ 4-1 overview........................................................................ 4-1 serial port settings ........................................................ 4-3 command summary ................................................ 4-5 serial port access levels .......................................... 4-4 terminal commands ................................................ 4-4 settings change .................................................................... 4-24 enter ....................................................................... 4-23 view ........................................................................ 4-22 terminal commands ACC and 2AC ........................................................ 4-7 ANALOG ............................................................... 4-7 DATE ..................................................................... 4-7 METER .................................................................. 4-8 MOTOR ................................................................. 4-11

Index-2

PASSWORD........................................................... 4-11 QUIT ...................................................................... 4-12 SER ........................................................................ 4-12 SET ........................................................................ 4-12 SHOW..................................................................... 4-13 STATUS ................................................................ 4-16 STOP ...................................................................... 4-18 STR ......................................................................... 4-18 SUMMARY ........................................................... 4-18 TARGET ................................................................ 4-19 TIME ...................................................................... 4-22

Connection scenarios ......................................................... 1-3 Connections, AC/control fail-safe tripping ........................................................... 2-7 starting, across the line ................................................. 2-12 starting, star-delta ......................................................... 2-14 two-speed motor .......................................................... 2-16 voltage connections ...................................................... 2-11 Connections, rear-panel ..................................................... 2-3 I/O diagram .................................................................. 2-6 power connections ....................................................... 2-5 rear-panel diagram ....................................................... 2-3 top-panel diagram ........................................................ 2-4 Conventions, typographical ............................................... 2-2

DC/AC connection scenarios ............................................. 1-3 Demand meter front-panel function ..................................................... 3-10 Display Message default display .............................................................. 3-2

Energy meter front-panel function ..................................................... 3-10 Event history See History Event report clearing the buffer ........................................................ 7-2 retrieval ........................................................................ 7-2 triggering conditions ..................................................... 7-2 Event summary .................................................................. 7-1

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index-3

Factory default settings password ...................................................................... 3-8 Fail-safe tripping ................................................................ 2-7 Features, 825-P Motor Relay monitoring .................................................................... 1-2 protection, optional ...................................................... 1-2 protection, standard....................................................... 1-1 Field serviceability ............................................................. 2-18 fuse replacement .......................................................... 2-19 real-time clock battery replacement ............................. 2-20 Firmware upgrade instructions overview ....................................................................... B-1 required equipment ...................................................... B-1 Front Panel See also Pushbuttons access levels ................................................................. 3-6 alarm/warning messages .............................................. 3-3 automatic messages....................................................... 3-2 diagram ..................................................................3-1, 3-5 function ........................................................................ 3-12 menus ........................................................................... 3-4 front-panel function ............................................... 3-10 history data ............................................................. 3-11, 7-1 meter values ........................................................... 3-10 motor statistics ........................................................ 3-12 reset trip/targets ...................................................... 3-14 set relay ................................................................... 3-14 front serial port ................................................. 3-15 messages ....................................................................... 3-2 padlock symbol ............................................................ 3-6 password entry ............................................................. 3-6 push button functions ................................................... 3-5 pushbuttons .................................................................. 3-1 rotating message display .............................................. 3-2 security ......................................................................... 3-6 Fuse replacement ............................................................... 2-19

History front-panel function ..................................................... 3-11 history data ................................................................... 7-1 History, use Port Summary command ............................... 7-1

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index-4

I/O diagram ........................................................................ 2-6 Installation AC/control connection diagrams ................................. 2-7 applications ................................................................... 1-3 field serviceability ........................................................ 2-18 rear-panel connections ................................................. 2-3 relay placement ............................................................ 2-1 Instantaneous meter front-panel function ..................................................... 3-10 Instantaneous metering ...................................................... 6-2 Introduction, relay .............................................................. 1-1

L M

Location, relay .................................................................... 2-1

Main Menu > Events ....................................................................... 3-11 > Meter ......................................................................... 3-10 > Motor Monitor .......................................................... 3-12 > Reboot/Restore ................................................3-18, 3-19 > Reset Thermal Capacity ............................................ 3-18 > Set/Show ................................................................... 3-14 > Status ........................................................................ 3-17 > Targets ...................................................................... 3-13 Manual overview, by chapter ............................................. 2-1 Max/Min meter front-panel function ..................................................... 3-10 Menus See Front Panel, menus Meter apparent power ............................................................. 3-10 current .......................................................................... 3-10 demand ......................................................................... 3-10 energy ........................................................................... 3-10 front-panel menu .......................................................... 3-10 instantaneous ................................................................ 3-10 max/min ....................................................................... 3-10 power ........................................................................... 3-10 power factor .................................................................. 3-10 reactive power .............................................................. 3-10 resetting quantities ....................................................... 3-10 RTD ............................................................................. 3-10 thermal ......................................................................... 3-10 voltage .......................................................................... 3-10

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index-5

Metering and Monitoring metering ....................................................................... 6-2 categories of meter data ......................................... 6-1 motor operating statistics ............................................. 6-4 overview........................................................................ 6-1 power measurement conventions ................................. 6-3 Motor statistics ................................................................... 3-12 Mounting flush, relay ................................................................... 2-2 in-/outdoor ................................................................... 2-1

N O P

Non-fail-safe tripping ........................................................ 2-7

Options, relay ..................................................................... 1-2

Password factory default .............................................................. 3-8 front panel change .................................................................... 3-6 entry ....................................................................... 3-6 Placement location ......................................................................... 2-1 mounting ...................................................................... 2-2 relay ............................................................................. 2-1 Power connections, rear-panel ............................................ 2-5 Power factor measurement convention .............................. 6-3 Protection and Logic Functions application data ............................................................ 5-2 basic motor protection overload (thermal model)........................................ 5-5 short circuit ............................................................ 5-10 ground fault basic information ................................................... 5-11 current imbalance/phase loss ................................. 5-13 jam ......................................................................... 5-12 phase reversal protection ....................................... 5-17 protection disable .................................................... 5-14 speed switch (stalling during start) ........................ 5-17 Star-delta (Wye-delta) starting ............................... 5-16 start inhibit ............................................................. 5-16 start monitoring ...................................................... 5-15 thermistor (PTC) monitoring ................................. 5-18
Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index-6

undercurrent (load loss) .......................................... 5-13 I/O configuration analog output .......................................................... 5-25 Aux assignments .................................................... 5-31 control action of each available function ............... 5-34 display enable ........................................................ 5-29 front-panel settings ................................................. 5-29 I/O assignments ...................................................... 5-30 input assignments ................................................... 5-34 output relay behavior ............................................. 5-27 timer function ......................................................... 5-28 trip inhibit (block) .................................................. 5-26 trip relay assignments ............................................ 5-30 logic explanation initiate trip .............................................................. 5-35 start/emergency restart logic ................................... 5-36 stop/trip logic ......................................................... 5-35 thermal overload curves ......................................... 5-38 unlatch trip ............................................................. 5-36 main settings current transformer configuration, full-load current settings ........................................... 5-4 identifier settings .................................................... 5-3 phase rotation, nominal frequency settings............. 5-3 voltage transformer configuration settings ............ 5-4 overview ....................................................................... 5-1 RTD-based protection defining RTD location ........................................... 5-20 RTD available types................................................ 5-20 RTD monitoring...................................................... 5-19 voltage-based protection frequency ................................................................ 5-24 load control function .............................................. 5-25 overvoltage ............................................................. 5-22 power factor ........................................................... 5-24 underpower ............................................................ 5-23 undervoltage ........................................................... 5-22 VAR function ......................................................... 5-23 Push button diagram .......................................................... 3-5

Reactive power measurement convention ......................... 6-3 Real-time clock battery replacement ................................. 2-20 Rear-panel diagram ............................................................ 2-3

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index-7

Relay mounting ...................................................................... 2-2 placement, installation ................................................. 2-1 Relay Enable LED normal operation .......................................................... 3-1 Relay Word Bits additional Word bits ..................................................... C-6 definitions .................................................................... C-4 overview ....................................................................... C-1 relay word and corresponding TAR command ............ C-2 relay word bit definitions ............................................. C-4 Reset meter values using front panel .......................................................... 3-10 Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) thermal meter ............................................................... 3-10

Serial Ports EIA-232 front panel .............................................................. 3-1 Serialized Events Recording report trigger settings .............................................................. 7-2 Set relay using front panel ........................................................... 3-14 Setting entry error messages .............................................. 3-22 Settings setting names DATE_F 7............................................................... -4 setting prompts date format ............................................................. 7-4 view/change on Front Panel ......................................... 3-19 Settings Record (worksheets) ............................................. E-1 DeviceNet Port ............................................................. E-20 SET command .............................................................. E-1 SET M command I/O assignments ...................................................... E-13 SET P command ........................................................... E-20 Specifications 825-CBCT core balance current transformer................ A-5 electrical ratings control circuits ....................................................... A-2 main circuits ........................................................... A-1 electromagnetic compatibility ...................................... A-4 mechanical ratings ....................................................... A-3 metering accuracy ........................................................ A-4 primary current transformers ....................................... A-5

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Index-8

processing .................................................................... A-5 RTD scanner module ................................................... A-3 standards ...................................................................... A-4 Star-delta starting ............................................................... 2-14 Starting across the line ............................................................... 2-12 Star-delta ...................................................................... 2-14

Target LEDs diagram ........................................................................ 3-1 Target reset front-panel function ..................................................... 3-14 Terminal emulation software, configure ............................ 4-3 Testing and Troubleshooting categories of relay testing ............................................ 8-1 overview ....................................................................... 8-1 testing commissioning tests ............................................... 8-1 periodic tests (routine maintenance) ...................... 8-11 selected functional tests ......................................... 8-6 troubleshooting instructions ......................................... 8-14 Thermal and RTD meter front-panel function ...................................................... 3-10 Thermal capacity meter ............................................................................ 3-10 thermal metering ................................................................ 6-2 Top-panel diagram .............................................................. 2-4 Trip message sample .......................................................................... 3-4 types of trips 3-3 Trip reset front-panel function ..................................................... 3-14 Tripping fail-safe ........................................................................ 2-7 non-fail-safe ................................................................. 2-7 Two-speed motor ............................................................... 2-16

Voltage connections ........................................................... 2-11

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004

Back Cover

Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P May 2004 10


2004 Rockwell International Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A.

You might also like